Home

Fluke PM-3370B User's Manual

1. 3 31 3 34 3 49 SECA os coe verte DES E RESP edd e tut pP urpis 3 24 4 129 Igi EE uc 4 29 Send odeur sts vue de need are t eee ae 2 2 SendDataBytes 2 2 2 SendlFEG ctos date ue Meow ta ce bye redet SR RA E RARE 2 2 SendSetup esses oes be leva a Genere ders eet n 2 2 Separaltor tok diee bett ea Laie D 3 Sequential command 4 14 4 15 ss ees PM 4 26 Service request 3 70 3 75 3 76 3 77 4 26 A 6 A 7 A 12 Setup label fo iis oeste d o Le eh Ae Due 4 105 ne RERUM 23 Short PORN ease sete ue aE 4 2 1 Signal 3 8 3 17 4 73 Signal 1 3 23 4 132 27 bad oe Gals ER IRR E ERE ME 3 26 2 10 3 25 3 26 3 30 5 Sofiko yer ees iind 3 65 3 79 3 80 4 102 4 103 SOUNA re tu susce ep eie ges B 27 SOUCe Eae e ange ed EET DEN e Ae EAD 4 109 Spaces cres sare qr eur eee tet Whee epic 4 3 SRG esses echar Adie ain ead 3 70 3 75 3 76 3 77 6 7 12 Standard event status
2. 2 1 Pulse 3 11 Pulse widths 3 62 25 QBDEGL BAS lt dd b 2 1 Query message 1 D 2 Query program D 3 INDEX 1 9 Questionable condition register 4 93 Questionable event enable register 4 93 Questionable event register 4 93 Questionable event 3 73 4 16 Questionable status 3 70 3 72 4 27 Me eas cheated nc iiec Uiles 4 1 R nn shes DUE e ee 4 29 RANGING sees ee des 3 71 Real time 3 43 3 68 4 82 4 122 B 22 B 25 Realtime COCK eer e ose tac at eta ort 4 105 Recall EU NI E CEU 3 78 4 22 Receive n ere PL II 2 2 4 99 REGTangular socer ed ROC d A oa 3 49 ha opere d ptorum 3 11 4 70 4 71 Relative i err vex xu dx A AE 3 49 Remote CPL state ko SR ROREM UR 4 97 Remote IEEE ceci
3. GASES 3 38 2 se ey UA E IR 3 38 Channel listi 2 2 ERN S nda 4 4 4 12 4 67 Character program 1 D 2 Character un AIR I dete tes ok 4 4 CHECKSUM ale Wino ya decal pang al reise 4 110 Glear status c ete 4 16 Command message D 2 Command program header D 3 Command 4 5 Common low pass 4 63 presist doe Se A ee A ere es 4 105 Conversion edere e eee 3 31 3 32 3 33 3 34 Coupled 1 4 14 Cursor a tosearch Ee Pee pen 4 105 3 62 3 81 4 24 4 49 4 18 Cutoff 3 21 4 63 4 115 4 117 Dabei Rees LE SA OA Ce Ef pata Sets 4 4 Data eder esee Ieri EVI A 4 99 Data terminal ready 4 97 Dri 3 68 iarciet erani S NE eat eta 3 50 4 49 ABM cosis mur Ru ES
4. tg ee 3 62 a 3 66 4 58 9 Polarity ee a eee oe ei 3 40 4 65 Positive transition 4 91 4 94 Positive video signal polarity 4 132 Post processing 3 45 3 46 3 47 Posttrgger n e RR OR Rev WE 3 27 4 80 Power of RENE 4 18 4 20 4 55 4 95 4 101 4 102 Preshoot ebbe rr Rb bee 3 62 Prestrigger i s RR Boke RR ERU 3 27 4 24 4 80 Pintera me y dene 3 66 4 58 Probe eeni dea da E Vane REIR epi 4 105 B 23 Program datas RE RM Rd ei eden D 2 Program data D 3 Program examples mic mp x E Ee ek e E odes A 1 Program header D 3 Program message i see meret gr eter onde D 2 Program message D 3 Program message D 2 Program message unit D 3 Programmed measurements A 4 Programming COncepts wide EE MS PER EE ARD Te 3 3 Programming
5. 3 21 High pass ud etes Y CERES 3 21 4 115 Histogram iz us td SER 3 46 3 55 4 40 B 20 Hold off edt oA unu pice 3 20 4 119 B 20 Horizont l 4 zb E d ed 4 105 HPGL iem dm ua x AREE Y ed 3 66 4 58 4 59 A 9 Hysteresis band aed RACER eA xr Eten 3 44 IBENI zie tr t UR uti uos 2 3 user RET MPO WE ee ten edu s m du er EH 2 2 2 4 4 19 4 21 20 IDEE state nmt ae 3 18 3 37 4 24 4 60 4 61 Immediate 0 1 4 124 Impedarice aL REIR be ex durs 4 23 4 64 Indefinite block uu nep Re e e R9 RE 4 4 state 3 18 3 37 Input atten ator Ee URSI ee c XR eR GERE IE B 20 Input channel Echo e AE RISE 3 38 4 87 4 88 4 124 Input 3 39 3 41 4 62 B 21 Inp t filtering eee Le ret t E e ei RC 3 39 Input 3 39 3 40 4 64 B 21 Instrument A 6 Instrument 3 5 Instrument 06 3 6 3 78 4 22 4 25 4 29 4 105 Inst
6. 877161 Figure 3 17 Post processing control 3 9 1 How to do post processing The post processing functions CALCulate1 and CALCulate2 comply with the front panel functions MATH1 and MATH2 of the CombiScope instrument They work only in the digital mode The use of the CALCulate functions is as follows 1 Select the source for the post processing function 2 Specify the settings of the post processing function 3 Enable the post processing function 4 Check the result of the post processing function 3 9 1 1 Select the source for the post processing function Select the trace that is to be sourced into the CALCulate function by sending the CALCulate lt n gt FEED command Examples Send CALCulate2 FEED CH3 Channel source for CALC2 Send CALCulate FEED M2 1 M2 1 source for CALC1 Empty traces may not be selected as input trace A memory register 1 location M1 may not be specified as the source feed for CALCulate1 and a memory register 2 location 2 j may not be the source feed for CALCulate2 After a RST command CH1 becomes the input trace for both CALculate functions Note CH3 and CH4 cannot be selected as source for the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments 3 46 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS TRACe CALCulate cu Mt 1 Hl M21 M3 1 M50 1 CALCulate t CH2 Mi_2 M22 M32 L 2 SENSe CH3
7. 4 125 Autorange settings 4 105 Autoranging be we eR 3 39 3 42 4 85 4 86 Autoranging 0 3 41 Autoranging time 3 44 AUTOS Cb si cru Yn e Sen ae i 3 80 18 AV6erage s een ep ER RUE eee A 18 Average 3 36 4 77 0 3 13 3 36 3 37 4 24 4 75 4 76 1 2 INDEX B Bandwidth astris tus Ea tana 3 22 3 40 4 23 4 24 4 63 Bandwidth 18 Baudrate 4 98 4 99 Beeper cubre sc es tu Bi RR 4 24 4 96 Binary dala ieri eve a 4 4 Block data o Tu 3 66 4 4 Boolean essay ey ee a ee eee eg iu 4 4 Brightness techie t ec MUR ie ge 3 61 4 45 Calculate eA Rete 3 45 3 46 3 47 4 33 4 34 4 36 Calibration 3 68 3 71 3 72 4 15 4 24 18 Calibration 3 68 CHIFCH2 EE
8. WINDow2 Figure 3 21 Screen layout of display functions 3 62 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 11 2 1 Readout of measurement data DISPlay WINDow 1 ITEXT n DATA query allows you to acquire measured data as displayed on the upper line s of the screen of your CombiScope instrument The following measured data values can be selected by specifying the number lt n gt in the query NUMBER n MEASUREMENT VALUE 1 2 MEAS1 MEAS2 data 10 11 12 13 20 21 30 40 51 52 CURSORS data 60 61 MATH FFT frequency amplitude MEAS1 MEAS2 DATA The MEAS1 and MEAS2 functions must be enabled and selected via front panel control MEAS1 data is read by sending the DISPlay WINDow TEXT1 DATA query and MEAS2 data by sending the DISPlay WINDow TEXT2 DATA query followed by reading the response strings The format of a response string is as follows lt meas_type gt lt meas_value gt lt suffix_unit gt DESCRIPTION meas type suffix unit DC voltage dc V AC RMS voltage rms V minimum voltage min V maximum voltage max V peak to peak voltage pkpk V low level voltage low V high level voltage high V overshoot percentage over 96 preshoot percentage pre 96 frequency freq Hz period time T S pulse width puls S rise time rise S fall time fall S duty cycle percentage duty 96 delay time between 2 channels del S USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUM
9. E 3 24 4 127 27 Field2 sie E ER Keri e 4 127 27 3 40 3 55 4 34 4 63 7 20 luc 3 62 Frequency eg eh a Ea 4 68 25 Frequency filtering 3 46 3 55 Front panel control i vere RR 4 14 Front panel 4 102 4 103 4 104 B 17 Front panel simulation 3 3 3 7 3 79 Function 0 3 3 3 5 Generators na etl NEUEN deg c 3 66 4 58 4 59 INDEX 1 5 GET asi semita tae ox dr Ace T 3 16 3 20 4 28 4 56 4 124 B 26 Glitchisettihgs sa d Vo eve Ele LU FE Leder tipi 3 20 canc UAI APR B ERO EIUS 4 62 H HAMMirg uad le ria 3 49 Handshake ir ibo ot Ree 4 98 HANNING 3 49 3 66 4 24 4 58 4 59 9 22 eet eter aoe 3 24 4 129 2 Be id ce cache hie RE ORE 4 4 HF rejecta IDEE 3 23 4 116 4 118 B 26 High sze tue Rata a tree E 3 11 3 62 4 67 4 68 4 70 4 72 4 73 B 28 High frequency
10. dp Rone Wis hens 3 63 ON rea Ee Ait estu aie dre E ase us 3 63 E Edge triggering s sco Eb ERE ERR eee 3 20 4 126 EIA 232 D eI AREIS eere cem E O 4 97 4 99 Envelopes ctt E RM oe 3 81 4 24 B 19 Envelope register A 11 Error scare eR etg RAD Rn A 1 B 19 Error reporting i seiner he 2 5 A 1 Error event 3 70 3 73 4 16 4 24 4 27 4 95 4 101 Error descriptioni emp 4 95 4 101 Emor number ieies Ex coe eee ters 4 95 4 101 Event f nctions ii ede wae Ren hacerla Rn E Rara die 3 81 Event handling o Rer e Mex e B 19 Event summary Dit xd dee Rem Robe RE RUN 4 27 Event trigger 1 4 105 EXAPPATIBAS 2 e EE px enel eia E p dogs A 2 EXAPPAT2 BAS xb ABE ie ea A 4 EXABPATS BAS 2 wiht atcha eoo Leste if oe A 5 EXAPPA2 BAS Wee IV bu PER ed A 5 EXAPPAS1 BAS a uh RE REI ONE p A 7 1 4 INDEX EXAPPAS32 BAS id ios a Lg c Ru aA A 8 EXAPPA4 BAS oie beer ES NOTE M STE Ven A 9 EXAPPA51 BAS 1e
11. 3 11 2 1 Readout of measurement data 3 11 2 2 Display of user defined text 3 11 2 3 Selection of softkey VI 3 16 Saving Restoring Instrument Setups 3 78 3 16 1 How to restore initial settings 3 78 3 16 2 How to save restore a setup via instrument memory 3 78 3 16 3 How to save restore a setup via the GPIB controller 3 78 3 17 Front Panel Simulation 3 79 3 17 1 How to simulate the pressing of a front panel key 3 79 3 17 2 How to simulate the operation of a softkey menu 3 80 3 18 Functions not Directly Programmable 3 81 4 COMMAND REFERENCE 44 4 4 Notation Conventions 4 1 4 1 1 Syntax specification notations 4 1 4 122 Datatypes 2 22 4 3 4 2 Command Summary 4 5 4 3 Command Descriptions 4 13 A APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES A 1 A 1 Measuring Signal Characteristics A 2 A 1 1 Making automatic measurements A 2 A 1 2 Making programmed measurements A 4 A 1 3 Reading measurement values A 5 A 2 Acquiring Waveform Traces A 5
12. NRf MAXimum MNimum lt NRf gt 50 1E6 NORMal INVerted n 22 4 INSTrument NSELect NRf MNimum lt NRf gt 1 2 SELect DIGital ANALog MEASure see Note 1 2 and 3 VOLTage response NR3 measure function voltage parameters measure parameters channel list READ VOLTage measure function voltage parameters measure parameters channel list see Note 1 2 and 3 response NR3 COMMAND REFERENCE 4 9 COMMAND PARAMETERS NOTES SENSe AVERage STATe Boolean COUNE NRf MAXimum MINimum NRf 2 4 4096 TYPE response SCAL FUNCtion XTIMe VOLTage lt gt no query OFF XTIMe VOLTage lt gt no query STATe XTIMe VOLTage lt gt query only 1 2 3 4 lt gt 50 1 2 lt gt 50 3 4 SWEep OFFSet TIME NRf MAXimum MINimum post trigger delay time pre trigger view time PDETection Boolean REALtime STATe Boolean TIMe NRf MAXimum MINimum over 10 divisions AUTO lt Boolean gt VOLTage lt n gt lt n gt 1 2 3 4 EDC RANGe AUTO lt Boolean gt OF FSet NRf MAXimum MINimum PTPeak NRf MAXimum MINimum over 8 divisions STATus OP ERation query only CONDition query only ENABIe numeric data range 0 32767 NTRansition numeric data range 0 32767 P
13. gt 6 CALC J DIFF POIN gt 1 CALC 5 TRAN FREQ WIND HAMM HANN 1 j i ABS CALC 5 TRAN FREQ TYPE REL gt 0 Other functions with 5 and SYST SET fi j ON CALC 5 MATH STAT oer MATH 2 m2 filter on off PARAM gt SOURCE yes no 1 DISPLAY 1 1DIV O 21 3 0 OFFSET 26 8mU ST7434 CROSS REFERENCES CALC J MATH EXPR yes no LEFT 80 hamming hanning rectang READOUT abs rel RETURN 4 8 877435 CROSS REFERENCES B 9 B 2 5 MEASURE menu DISP WIND TEXT2 DATA DISP WIND TEXT1 DATA 577436 Notes ch3 is not applicable for PM33x0B ext instead of ch4 for PM33x0B 2 6 DTB DE D TB menu Programmable with the SAV RCL and SYST SET commands 10 CROSS REFERENCES B 2 7 SAVE RECALL menu SAVE CLEAR CLEAR MEMORY r MEMORY CONFIRM CONFIRM TRAC DATA yes yes I TRAC COPY e ARE IOVERRULE SURE 3 PROTECT no no c RECALL RECALL RECALL COPY REGISTER REGISTER ___ MEMORY MEMORY MEMORY TRACK och4 o ac 1 TRAC DATA 2 amp m1 1 OO emi 1 2 om2 FROM d TRACK DISPLAY DISPLAY 9 on off on off CLEAR CLE
14. 3 70 3 73 4 16 4 17 4 18 4 20 4 27 4 60 Standard 4 33 4 109 4 111 Status byte 3 70 3 73 3 74 4 16 4 17 4 26 4 27 Status 0 1 40 1 24 Status model x RR E SUN 3 70 Status reporting 3 70 3 74 4 92 string program ie opt eh ood teed ate ti ed ates D 2 String dala RD died ed 4 4 SubSystelms s 3 SR AE EI A Arad M eR MN 3 5 e Eee us 4 36 17 24 Sweep time seca bows IE EET RS 4 83 4 84 4 114 alc Ra Akte Lex 3 26 3 71 pe EHE I enr IDE qus 4 2 Syrichronizatior ees ERR 24 Systemi dale se 52 e RO USER E EPA 4 100 System Settings 2 pe ERA RE TS PRA A 10 System ceres were AS desc e 2 1 Systertime 2 5 ont e Eois stes bir ett ere f Le 4 107 SYSTem DATE 824M aruda taped id dp 3 68 SYSTem TIME uere IR Rd Pe p EE RS 3 68 INDEX 1 11 teste mto Erie d
15. M23 M3 3 M50 3 CH4 14 m4 H M3 4 M50 4 CALCulate2 CALCulate FEED M3 2 CALCulate2 FEED M2 4 ST7162 Figure 3 18 Post processing feed definition 3 9 1 2 Specify the settings of the post processing function When desired specify the settings of the post processing function to be used The following settings can be programmed the filter type of the FFT function RECTanguler HAMMing HANNing the width of the low pass filter window 3 5 7 39 41 points the width of the differential window 3 5 7 127 129 points Example Send gt CALCulate2 TRANsform FREQuency WINDow HAMMing Defines the Hamming filter for the FFT process 3 9 1 3 Enable the post processing function Enable the desired post processing function by using the STATe command of the calculate function concerned The following post processing functions are available STANDARD AVAILABLE mathematical calculations MATH frequency filtering FILTer FREQuency frequency domain transformations FFT TRANsform FREQuency OPTIONAL histogram transformation TRANsform HISTogram integrating traces INTegral differentiating traces DERivative alias DIFFerential Example Send CALCulate2 TRANsform FREQuency STATe ON Enables FFT The post processing is automatically executed when a tra
16. 3 30 3 4 2 2 Repetitive acquisitions 3 30 3 4 8 Conversion of trace data 3 31 3 4 3 1 Conversion of 8 bit samples to 3 32 3 4 3 2 Conversion of 16 bit samples to integer 3 33 3 4 3 3 Conversion to voltage values 3 34 Averaging Acquisition Data 3 36 Channel Selection 3 38 Signal Conditioning 3 39 3 7 1 AC DC ground coupling 3 39 3 7 2 Inputfiltering 3 40 3 7 8 Inputimpedance 3 40 94 4 Input polarity 2 erre Rm 3 40 3 7 5 Vertical range and offset 3 40 3 7 6 Autoranging attenuators 3 41 Time Base Control 3 42 3 81 Number of samples 3 42 3 8 2 Time base speed 3 42 3 8 8 Realtime acquisition 3 43 3 8 4 Autoranging time 3 44 3 9 3 10 Trace Memory 3 10 1 Trace formatting 3 10 2 Copying traces to memory 3 10 3 Writing data to trace memory 3 10 4 Reading data from trace 3 11 3 12 Print Plot Functio
17. TST Self test Syntax TST Response 0 1 0 Self test okay 1 Self test not okay Description The TST query initiates a RAM ROM test in the instrument and returns the result of the test The result of the RAM ROM test is 0 if the test is completed without detecting any error If the result is 1 the self test failed Upon successful completion of TST the instrument settings are restored to their values prior to the execution of TST Example Send TST Read lt result IF result 1 THEN PRINT Self test failed instrument must be repaired 4 30 COMMAND REFERENCE WAI Wait to continue Syntax WAI Description The WAI command prevents the instrument to execute any further command until all previous commands and queries have been completed The WAI command is used to force sequential execution of commands by the instrument On receipt of the WAI command the instrument executes all pending commands and queries before it executes the next command or query Restrictions Be careful The GPIB controller may interrupt the program by means of timeout So verify first whether the timeout period is long enough to cover the operation time of the instrument Example Send RST Resets the instrument Send gt INITiate First initiation of the trigger system Send WAI Send INITiate Second initiation of the trigger system Notice that the second initiation is only ex
18. 2048 4096 SENSe AVERage TYPE Response SCAL Query form SENSe AVERage COUNt MINinum MAXimum Response 2 4 8 16 2048 4096 If MINimum was specified 2 is returned If MAXimum was specified 4096 is returned Description The SENS AVER COUN command sets the preprocessing average count factor The count factor is a multiple of 2 The average value is calculated by the oscilloscope as follows AVG X n The SENS AVER TYPE query returns the preprocessing average type used which is the SCALar implementation If the oscilloscope is in the analog mode error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated After a RST command the average count factor is 8 Example Send RST Resets the instrument Send CONFigure AC Configures for AC RMS Send gt SENSe AVERage COUNt 16 Average count factor becomes 16 Send SENSe AVERage ON Switches average function on Send gt INITiate Initiates trace averaging Send WAI Waits for INITiate to finish Send TRACe CH1 Queries channel 1 trace Read lt channel 1 trace averaged over 16 sequential acquisitions Front panel compliance The SENSe AVERage COUNt command is the remote equivalent of the front panel AVERAGE count option of the ACQUIRE menu 4 78 COMMAND REFERENCE SENSe FUNCtion OFF SENSe FUNCtion ON SENSe FUNCtion STATe Syntax SENSe FUNCtion OFF XTIMe VOLTage lt n gt
19. Saving Recalling Instrument Setups A 6 A 3 1 settings to from internal memory A 6 A 3 2 settings to from computer disk memory A 7 4 Making a Hardcopy of the Screen A 9 A 5 Pass Fail Testing A 10 A 5 1 Saving a pass fail test setup A 10 A 5 2 Restoring a pass fail test A 11 A 5 3 Running a 1 A 12 VII B CROSS REFERENCES B 1 B 1 Cross Reference Front Panel Keys Commands B 1 B 2 Cross Reference Softkey Menus Commands B 3 B 2 1 ACQUIRE menu B 3 B 2 2 CURSORS menu B 4 2 3 DISPLAY menu B 5 B 2 4 MATHPLUS MATH menu B 6 B 2 5 MEASURE B 9 2 6 DEL D TB menu B 9 2 7 SAVE RECALL menu B 10 B2 8 SETUPS men IR Eus B 10 B 2 9 menu B 11 B 2 10 TRIGGER menu B 12 B 2 11 UTILITY menu B 14 B 2 12 VERTICAL B 16 B 3 Cross Reference Functions
20. Boolean block data indefinite block dab definite block digit character data string data channel list digit lt digit gt Integer notation that specifies a number lt NRf gt hexadecimal data octal data binary data Any decimal or non decimal numeric data type hex digit hex digit hex digit is one of the characters 0 9 or A octal digit octal digit octal digit is one of the digits O 7 binary digit binary digit binary digit O 1 0 1 0 equals OFF 1 equals definite block indefinite block This is used to transfer data that consists of any arbitrary 8 bit codes 0 dab This data type is of indefinite length and must be terminated by NL END Any arbitrary 8 bit data byte code 3t digit length dab This data type is of definite length digit specifies the number of bytes of length length specifies the number of dab bytes One of the ASCII characters O 9 alpha character alpha character digit alpha character is any alphabetic ASCII character Sequence of ASCII characters placed between single or double quotes Examples This is a string This also lt NRf gt Example 2 COMMAND REFERENCE 4 5 4 2 Command Summary The following list is a sum
21. feste ure RPG unite 4 69 WINDOW2 utet RR e cea em 3 61 3 65 4 50 4 51 4 53 X XPOS ausu dee ty bod ed ot o iode d sete aces e E Ehe 3 81 X NSU use beh RU IER E RDUM LOUER LEN UO pq 4 23 4 60 X deflection 2 3 eR mee eee 4 23 4 60 28 KOM ib Ln Deo SR ac RU A AT 4 98 KON bane DRUG ERE OPI ERE IER Que PU ies 4 98
22. B 2 11 UTILITY UTILITY menu SYST COMM SER SYST COMM SER SYST COMM SER SYST COMM SER SYST COMM SER REC BAUD gt REC REC BTs REC TRA PAR _ gt RTS CONT DIR gt Notes ch3 is not applicable for ext instead of ch4 for PM33x0B lt HCOP DEV SYST DATE SYST TIME 577439 CROSS REFERENCES B 15 RETURN 4 RETURN 4 BEEP on off CLICK on off SYST BEEP i DATA DISP WIND2 TEXT CLE ST7440 STAT 16 CROSS REFERENCES B 2 12 VERTICAL menu VERTICAL MENU ON NP FILT OFF INP1 IMP lt NP2 IMP lt NP3 IMP lt NP4 IMP ST7441 Note 509 1 MQ only applicable for PM3394B CROSS REFERENCES B 17 Cross Reference Functions Commands This section describes the SCPI commands that are related to the oscilloscope functions and frontpanel keys The oscilloscope functions and keys are described in chapter 5 Function Reference of the Operating Guide The SCPI commands are specified in chapter 4 COMMAND REFERENCE of the SCPI Programming Manual FUNCTION KEYS MENUS RELATED SCPI COMMAND S ACQUISITION LENGTH key TB MODE menu
23. Figure 3 9 Post triggering and post triggering are programmed with the SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME command A positive parameter value specifies a post trigger delay whereas a negative value results in a pre trigger view After RST the SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME is set 0 005 which results in a pre trigger view of 5 ms Because the RST value of the total acquisition time SENSe SWEep TIME is 10 ms the trigger point is positioned in the middle of the trace PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME 0 001 1 lmsposttrigger CALL Send 0 8 SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME 1E 3 1 lmspre trigger 3 28 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 4 1 5 External triggering External triggering is only possible for the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments Channel 4 is used as the external trigger channel with the following view possibilities attenuator positions 0 1 and 1 V div AMP key trigger slope positive or negative EXT TRIG key trigger coupling AC or DC AC DC key The view facility of the external trigger channel is switched on by sending the SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIMe VOLTage4 command or by sending the SYSTem KEY 812 command to simulate the pressing of the TRIG VIEW key on the front panel Note The view facility of the external trigger channel can only be switched when EXTernal or INTernal4 is programmed as the trigger source Peak detection is off Autoset scans for t
24. NODE NR SPECIFICATION 0 End node settings length 1 byte zero 1 2 3 4 Channel 1 2 3 4 settings length 8 bytes attenuation channel on off input coupling DC AC grounded invert on off input impedance 509 1MO attenuation mode continuous discrete Y_offset_position 14 Probe scale settings length 24 bytes probe_correction_factors CH1 2 3 4 probe_scale bits probe_unit CH1 2 3 4 probe_scale_factors CH1 2 3 4 15 Common vertical settings length 6 bytes add CH1 CH2 add CH3 CH4 display mode alternate chopped automatic display on off bandwidth limiter on off averaging on off envelope mode on off averaging factor vertical magnify factor 16 Horizontal settings length 9 bytes x deflection on off reset on off acquisition lock on off scope mode digital analog peak detection on off horizontal mode auto triggered single shot multiple shot x deflection source CH1 2 3 4 line digital magnify factor analog magnify on off acquisition length factor x position 17 Main timebase settings length 26 bytes timebase trigger mode edge TV pattern state glitch intensified on off main timebase on off trigger slope pos neg TV trig mode field1 field2 line noise suppression on off mtb mode continuous var steps discrete 1 2 5 steps peak peak trig on off triggered on off armed on off Vpp trig slope roll mode stop on trig continuous autoset trigger gap on off roll mode on off real time only on off
25. Response lt definite_block gt Limitations For the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments CH3 and is not applicable CH4is the external trigger view channel so EXTernal is the alias for CHA Mi E is the alias for Mi 4 COMMAND REFERENCE 4 111 Description The TRACe query reads a binary trace block from channel acquisition memory CH1 to or from register memory M1 to M8 for standard memory and M9 to M50 for extended memory The TRACe command writes a binary trace block to register memory M1 to M8 for standard memory and M9 to M50 for extended memory A specified constant can also be written into trace register memory If a constant is specified the rounded signed constant value is copied to all trace points in the register memory Trace data can only be read when the trace memory is not empty The internal trace administration data is not affected If the length of the trace block doesn t match the length of the destination register the following happens e lf the destination register is longer the remainder of the destination register is not affected e f the destination register is shorter the remainder of the trace block is ignored In both cases no error is reported If the oscilloscope is in the analog mode error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated Note If the queried trace is being built the query action will take place after completion of the buildin
26. column 1 2 3 13 row 1 101 102 103 113 row 2 201 202 203 213 row 3 11302 303 313 row 4 2 402 304 413 row 7 6 702 703 713 row 8 801 802 803 813 Note number positions 1 to 6 represent the softkeys 3 80 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 TRST 1 Resets the instrument CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem KEY 104 1 Enables the UTILITY softkey menu CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem KEY 2 1 Selects the PROBE option CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem KEY 5 1 Selects the PROBE CORR option CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem KEY 4 1 Selects the 10 1 option CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem KEY 104 1 Disables the UTILITY softkey menu this example the probe correction factor for input channel 1 is setat 10 1 via softkey menu UTILITY AUTOSET SIMULATION CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem KEY 101 1 Simulates Autoset Autoset scans for the presence of a signal on channel 1 2 and the external trigger input If there is a signal present on the external trigger input the EXTernal trigger channel is selected as trigger source and the external trigger view facility becomes active If the external trigger is the only signal available external trigger view and channel 1 CH1 are switched on 3 17 2 How to simulate the operation of a softkey menu The MEASure MENU command allows you to enable or disable the display of the softkey menus The SYSTem KEY 1 to 6 command allows you to sim
27. oo tet tte t eb NERA A Dc Nees eho EE 3 62 B 28 MIN MAX 5er Reste ek em ye E rre RED Yee Dg e Pes 3 49 MINIMUM uc ERE EE bete ine 4 69 4 70 Multiple 3 15 Multiple 1 3 14 etg eee e 3 26 3 81 Multipl ee d core e e d 4 36 22 Negative transition filler 4 90 4 93 Negative video signal 4 132 eie be a E Re DW 3 78 4 105 Non decimal numeric program data D 2 Non terminal 5 4324 4 1 Nora trig soe a piled me uri S CHR 3 25 E 4 3 eva tune peo Pto um 4 3 me vdd desee ed 4 3 IN Bf oed odes et utr ned A 4 3 NTSG teat as cen ate sae AE come Seed Buccal 3 24 4 129 Numeric ea ae aces Ge DR RR 4 4 Octal data 4 4 SIME 3 41 4 87 Operation complete 3 74 4 20 Operation condition 4 90 Ope
28. 2 Sets real time mode on Trigger source becomes channel 2 Trigger level becomes 20 mV Triggering is done at positive rising and negative falling trigger edges Initiates acquisition Fetches AC RMS value Reads AC RMS value The TRIGger SLOPe command is the remote equivalent of the front panel TRIG1 TRIG2 TRIG3 TRIG4 keys and the TRIGGER MAIN TB edge option of the TRIGGER menu 4 124 COMMAND REFERENCE TRIGger SEQuence 1 SOURce TRIGger STARt SOURce Syntax Alias Query form Response TRIGger SEQuence 1 SOURce IMMediate INTernal lt n gt EXTernal LINE BUS TRIGger STARt SOURce IMMediate INTernal lt n gt IMMediate INTernal lt n gt EXTernal LINE BUS EXTernal LINE BUS Immediate sweeping no waiting for a trigger Input channel lt n gt is used as trigger source n 1 2 30r 4 Input channel 4 is used as external trigger source only for The source signal is determined from the AC line voltage Triggering is done by a TRG command or GET code via the GPIB TRIGger SEQuence 1 SOURce TRIGger STARt SOURce IMM INT lt n gt EXT LINE BUS IMM INT lt n gt EXT LINE BUS Immediate sweeping no waiting for a trigger Input channel lt n gt used as trigger source n 1 2 3 or 4 Input channel 4 used as external trigger source only for The source signal determ
29. In this program example a trace of 512 samples from the actual signal at input channel 1 is read The received data block is converted to an array of voltages After each sample conversion the voltage value is printed This program example works for traces of 512 samples consisting of 8 bits 1 byte or 16 bits 2 bytes samples Note The program is supplied on floppy under file name EXCNVTRC BAS DIM sample 512 Array of sample voltages DIM response AS STRING 1033 Trace data response string DIM peaktop AS STRING 10 Peak to peak response string DIM offs AS STRING 10 Offset response string CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Resets the instrument CALL Send 0 8 CONFigure AC 1 1 Configures for optimal AC RMS settings Signal offset also becomes zero CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 nitiates single acquisition CALL Send 0 8 WAI TRACe CH1 1 Requests channel 1 trace CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads channel 1 trace nr of digits VAL MID response 2 1 nr of bytes VAL MID response 3 nr of digits 2 sample length ASC MID response 3 nr of digits 1 nr of samples nr of bytes sample length 8 CALL Send 0 8 SENSe VOLTage RANGe PTPeak 1 Queries ptp CALL Receive 0 8 peaktop 256 Reads ptp ptpeak VAL LEFT peaktop IBCNT z length CALL Send 0 8 SENSe VOLTage RANGe OFFSet 1 Queries offset CALL Receive 0 8 offs 256 Reads of
30. NEXT i ELSE sample is 2 bytes FOR 1 TO nr of samples Determine msb of trace i value from block data Determine lsb of trace i value from block data IF msb lt 128 THEN trace i msb 256 lsb ELSE trace i msb 256 x 256 lsb sample i trace i 51200 peak to peak offset NEXT i END IF Note For an explanation plus a program example about Conversion of trace data refer to section 3 4 3 Example 2 Send FORMat INTeger 8 Number of trace point bits becomes 8 Send TRACe M1 2 5 All trace points of trace 2 of memory register 1 are setto the value 00000101 bit value 4 1 Send FORMat INTeger 16 Number of trace point bits becomes 16 Send TRACe 2 3 1025 All trace points of trace 3 of memory register 2 are set to the value 0000010000000001 bit value 1024 1 Front panel compliance The TRACe command is the remote equivalent of the front panel SAVE ACQ TO MEMORY option of the SAVE menu The TRACe query is the remote equivalent of the front panel RECALL REGISTER MEMORY option of the SAVE menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 113 TRACe POINts Syntax Alias TRACe POINts lt source_trace gt lt acquisition_length gt DATA POINts lt source_trace gt lt acquisition_length gt lt source_trace gt lt acquisition_length gt lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum CHn Mi n nz1 4 i21 8 standard memory i
31. de phd ae dae dew ders 27 video 1 0 3 23 4 126 Uppercase caw detest aw pe EVER ee ee 4 2 x22 sese et Ait ths TA en aging 3 79 4 18 4 102 User text 3 65 4 24 4 50 4 51 4 53 27 V 3 63 3 63 Variable mode wa ae die RE EE 4 83 3 63 Vertical 3 40 4 88 4 89 Video field 0 4 128 Video frames RO e e EORR E ee RU 4 3 23 Video line number 4 128 Video Syst m s s uc E Mese Ta ee Re xA UE B 27 Video triggering 3 20 3 24 4 126 VOLTAGE uut eroi tds E ew Acer Rum 3 72 Voltage 3 9 4 67 Rin UM Rcge EX 3 50 3 51 4 49 W Wait for AVERage 3 37 Wait for TRIGger 3 18 Waiting for 3 26 3 71 Waveform races ssec ks bitte ll E ARE hare MARET A 5 sie a wlan
32. measure function part in the query header Executing a READ query aborts any pending acquisition The READ query does not affect the instrument settings Before the READ query the CONFigure command must be executed to set up the instrument for the measurement task to be performed Executing CONFigure and READ in order without any command in between is equivalent to executing the MEASure query A READ query allows the same parameter sets as the corresponding MEASure and CONFigure instructions Their use distinguishes from these instructions in that they only serve to specify the desired result from a READ query They don t affect the instrument settings They may also be sent for reasons of compatibility with the preceding CONFigure instruction The default VOLTage node specifies that the requested characteristic relates to the voltage component of the signal For example the rise time or frequency of the voltage A READ query can be executed only when the oscilloscope is in the digital mode INStrument SELect DIGital The digital mode is selected after RST Executing this query when the instrument is in the analog mode generates execution error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required COMMAND REFERENCE 4 75 Note Because the READ query leaves instrument settings unaffected it can very well be used as follows to read a measured value within a cursor limited acquisition area Press the CURSORS key on the
33. 1 50 extended memory lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum 512 2048 4096 8192 standard memory 512 8192 16384 32768 extended memory Notes 512 is the default value Length becomes 512 points Length becomes 8192 if no extended memory is available Length becomes 32768 if extended memory is available Query form TRACe POINts source trace MINimum MAXimum Response source trace CHn Mi n n 1 4 i 1 8 standard memory 1 50 extended memory If MINimum was specified the minimum possible trace length is returned If MAXimum was specified the maximum possible trace length is returned acquisition length 4 114 COMMAND REFERENCE Description Defines the trace length number of trace points for all traces The acquisition length and the length of all internal traces is programmed to the value specified in acquisition length If the acquisition length parameter is omitted the default value of 512 is assumed If the oscilloscope is in the analog mode error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated Limitations For the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments CH3 and is not applicable the external trigger view channel so EXTernal is the alias for CH4 Mi E is the alias for Mi 4 Coupled values There exists a coupling between programming of the sweep time and the number of trace points acquisition len
34. 25 100 for 16 bit samples 4 6400 25600 e Multiply the result with the following correction factor for 8 bit samples 10 dB 25 0 4 for 16 bit samples 10 dB 6400 0 0015625 So the conversion from a trace sample value Ts to a trace point value Ps is expressed by the equations for 8 bit samples Ps Ts 100 0 4 for 16 bit samples Ps Ts 25600 0 0015625 Note For an explanation of Ts and Ps refer to section 3 4 3 Conversion of trace data When relative FFT calculation is selected the amplitude trace point values represent the relative strength of the frequency components The component with the highest amplitude is taken as the reference level referred to as the 0 dB level When absolute FFT calculation is selected the amplitude trace point values depend on the absolute reference level as selected via the CURSORS READOUT front panel menu which can be one of the following dBm reference 1 mW with REFerence IMPedance of 500 dBm reference 1 mW with REFerence IMPedance of 6000 dBuV reference 1 uV Vrms reference RMS signal amplitude USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 51 Absolute FFT amplitudes are calculated from the true signal using the information on the actual attenuator setting in the range from 5 V div to 2 mV div This results in an offset value to be added to the relative FFT amplitude for each attenuator setting In any attenuator setting t
35. 8 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive PACE XON NONE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit PACE NONE XON Enables the X on X off handshake NONE Disables the X on X off handshake SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive PARity TYPE EVEN ODD NONE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit PARity TYPE EVEN ODD NONE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive BAUD MIN MAX SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit BAUD MIN MAX 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 If MINimum was specified 75 is returned If MAXimum was specified 38400 is returned SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive BITS SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit BITS 7 8 COMMAND REFERENCE 4 99 Query form SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive PACE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit PACE Response XON NONE XON X on X off handshake enabled NONE No X on X off handshaking Query form SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive PARity TYPE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit PARity TYPE Response EVEN ODD NONE Description BAUD sets the baudrate of the EIA 232 D RS 232 C interface for both the receive and transmit channel BITS sets the number of data bits of the EIA 232 D RS 232 C interface for both the receive and transmit channel Instead of 7 MINimum can be specified Instead of 8 MAXimum can be specified The number of stop bits is always one If 7 data bits are specified and the parity type is NONE a
36. Commands B 17 C MANUAL CONVENTIONS 1 C 1 Abbreviations Used C 1 C 2 Glossary of Symbols Used C 4 C37 Listof Tables 22 uu Ee uu ERR C 4 C 4 List of Figures C 5 C 5 Documents Referenced C 6 D STANDARDS INFORMATION D 1 D 1 SCPI Conformance Information D 1 D 2 List of Implemented IEEE 488 2 Syntactical Elements D 2 E SUMMARY OF SYSTEM SETTINGS E 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL 1 1 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL The SCPI Programming Manual for the CombiScope instruments describes how to program your CombiScope instrument via the IEEE bus using SCPI commands 1 1 What this Manual Contains A complete table of contents is given at the beginning of the manual Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 ABOUT THIS MANUAL Explains what the SCPI programming manual for the CombiScopes instruments contains GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING Tells you how to get started quickly with your CombiScope instrument You can execute the program examples per sub section or from the beginning until the end USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS Explains how SCPI works for your CombiScope instrument from the functional point of view Section 3 1 is an introduction and section 3 2 explai
37. MSS Master Summary Status bit 6 Indicates that there is an event that causes the device to request service The MSS bit is cleared when the event s in the overlaying status structure that caused the Service Request are cleared ESB Event Summary Bit bit 5 Contains the summary of the Standard Event Status register structure MAV Message Available bit 4 Indicates whether the Output Queue contains at least one message bit 1 or is empty bit 0 QUES QUEStionable status bit 3 Contains the summary of the QUEStionable status register structure bit2 Error Event queue bit Indicates whether the Error Event queue contains at least one message bit 1 or is empty bit 0 bit1 Device Dependent Status bit not used bitO Device Dependent Status bit not used Example Send STB Read 4 4 equal to the binary value 100 This means that bit 2 is set indicating that there is an error message in the Error event Queue 4 28 COMMAND REFERENCE TRG Trigger Syntax TRG Description The TRG command triggers the instrument by generating a Group Execute Trigger GET code Example Send gt RST Resets the instrument Send TRIGger SOURce BUS GPIB becomes trigger source Send gt INITiate Initiates the instrument once Send TRG Triggers the instrument Send FETCh FREQuency Fetches the frequency Read lt frequency COMMAND REFERENCE 4 29
38. lt number of system settings bytes gt lt system settings bytes gt indefinite length format memory register of the envelope e g 2_1 number of envelope trace bytes envelope trace bytes definite length format Application summary e Create a complete Pass Fail test setup e Request the file name in which to save the current instrument setup and open the file for output e Call routine Save Setup to save the instrument settings e Call routine Save Envreg to save the reference envelope e Routine Save Setup does the following Requests the instrument settings by sending SYSTem SET and by reading the response data setupin Writes the length plus data to the opened file APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES 11 e Routine Save Envreg does the following Requests for a memory register to read the envelope from e g 2 1 Requests the reference envelope by sending 0 TRACe M2 1 and by reading the envelope data envelope Writes the envelope register length plus data to the opened file e Close the opened file Application program Note Q uick BASIC program is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPA51 BAS The program code that runs under TestTeam Plus and LabWindows is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPB51 BAS 5 2 Restoring a pass fail test setup In the following example the pass fail test setup information as saved in section A 5 1 is restored from a file on disk The name of
39. reading the settings Front panel compliance The SYSTem SET query followed by the SYSTem SET command gives a remote possibility to save and recall complete or partial instrument setups COMMAND REFERENCE 4 107 SYSTem TIME Syntax Query form Response Description SYSTem TIME lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt hour lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum Range from 0 to 23 minute lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum Range from 0 to 59 second lt NRf gt MAXimum Range from O to 59 SYSTem TIME MINimum MAXimum MINimum MAXimum hour minute second MINimum MAXimum The time values returned of type lt NR1 gt If MINimum was specified the lowest possible value is returned If MAXimum was specified the highest possible value is returned The SYSTem TIME command programs the real time clock of the instrument by specifying the hour minute and second Only a 24 hours time format is supported The current time is not changed after a RST command Example Send SYS Send SYS Read 23 59 59 em IMI E 11 22 33 em IMI E MAX MAX MAX Front panel compliance The SYSTem TIME command is the remote equivalent of the UTILITY CLOCK hh mm ss softkey menu Sets the system time to 11 hours 22 minutes 33 seconds i e 11 22 33 Queries for the max values possible Reads 23 hours 59 min
40. 1 the test has failed Table 3 3 Operation Status bits 3 72 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 15 1 2 Questionable status data CONDition filter EVENt ENABle VOLTage 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 2 2 2 0 3 a 3 TEMPerature 4 4 4 0 5 5 5 0 6 6 6 0 7 7 7 CALibration 8 8 8 Overload 500 9 9 9 0 10 10 10 0 11 11 11 0 12 12 12 0 18 13 13 0 14 14 14 0 15 15 15 STATus QUEStionable CONDition PTRansition NTRansition EVENt ENABle ST7157 Figure 3 25 Questionable Status structure BIT MEANING 0 VOLTage This bit is set if a digital sample value is clipped at the maximum or minimum value while a FETCh query is done on the sample array This bit is also set if a FETCh query did not succeed because the shape of the waveform did not match the measure function request Example FETCh FREQuency in the case of only half a sine wave TEMPerature This bit is set by the instrument if the difference between the current temperature and the temperature at the moment of the last calibration exceeds a certain level This is an indication that the instrument must be calibrated The temperature is sensed internally about half an hour after power on This bit is reset after power on and after calibrating CALibration This bit is set by the instrument when
41. 500 offset calculation From the Vrms offset value the dBm 50Q offset value is calculated as follows 500 offset 20 los Vrms offset 0 2236068 Note P R J 10E 3 50 0 2236068 Example for attenuator setting 0 5 V div dBm 50Q offset 20 910g 1 118034 0 2236068 13 9794 dBm 6000 offset calculation From the Vrms offset value the dBm 600Q offset value is calculated as follows dBm 600Q offset 20 log Vrms offset 0 7745967 Note R J 1E 3 600 0 7745967 Example for attenuator setting 0 5 V div dBm 600Q offset 20 1010 1 118034 0 7745967 3 1875874 offset calculation From the Vrms offset value the dBuV offset value is calculated as follows offset 20 og Vrms offset 1 0 6 Note 0 dBuV 1 uV 1 0E 6 V at 500 impedance Example for attenuator setting 0 5 V div dBuV offset 20 log 1 118034 1E 6 120 9691 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 53 SUMMARY OF CALCULATED OFFSET VALUES ATTENUATOR SETTING Vrms dBm 50Q dBm 600Q dBpV 5 Vidiv 11 18034 33 9794 23 187588 140 9691 2 44721359 26 0206 15 228787 133 0103 1 2 236068 20 0 92081872 126 9897 52 22 1118034 13 9794 3 1875874 120 9691 02 on 0 4472136 6 0206 4 771213 113 0103 QT cs 0 2236068 0 0 10 791813 106 9897 50 mV div 0 118034 6 0206 16 812413 100 9691 20 A 0 0447214 13 979392 24 771206
42. RCL and SYST SET commands READOUT AT 1 AT ratio ph T trg M 360 AV ratio AV 100 Vi V2 RETURN gt READOUT 20 21 lt DISP WIND TEXT40 DATA 51 52 10 lt DISP WIND TEXT11 DATA 12 DISP WIND TEXT E DATA 577433 CROSS REFERENCES B 2 3 DISPLAY ANALOG oe cimo DISPLAY Notes DISPLAY menu ANALOG MODE DISPLAY X DEFL 1 on off 1 i X SOURCE c X DEFL 4 Ch 1 ch3 1 TEXT gt ch4 v d line RETURN 4 DIGITAL MODE DISPLAY X vs Y TEXT 1 TRIG IND on off i REGISTERS TRACK 1 WINDOWS acq LO GND IND ono m1 on o VERT _ D USER J MAGNIFY text gt off E XvsY x delete m3 2 3 1 TEXT gt m3 3 insert dots 4 5 1 RETURN 4 RETURN 4 4 5 DISP WIND2 TEXT DATA SYST SET DISP WIND2 TEXT CLE DISP WIND2 TEXT STAT ST7084 ch3 is not applicable for ext instead of ch4 for PM33x0B 6 CROSS REFERENCES B 2 4 MATH MATHPLUS MATH menu CALC FILT FREQ STAT gt CALC INT STAT gt CALC DIFF STAT gt CALC TRAN FREQ STAT gt CALC 5 TRAN HIST STAT gt 6 CALC FILT FREQ POIN
43. SENSe FUNCtion OFF XTIMe VOLTage SUM lt i j gt SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIMe VOLTage lt n gt SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIMe VOLTage SUM lt i j gt n 11121344 1 CH1 2 CH2 3 CH3 4 CH4 Note not applicable for PM33x0B ijj 1 2 3 4 1 2 CH1 CH2 3 4 CH3 not for PM33x0B Query form SENSe FUNCtion STATe XTIMe VOLTage lt n gt Response 0 1 0 Input channel n is off 1 Input channel n is on Query form SENSe FUNCtion STATe XTIMe VOLTage SUM lt i j gt Response 0 1 0 Addition of channel i j is off 1 Addition of channel i j is on Description The SENSe FUNCtion ON command switches the input channel specified by n or the addition of two input channels specified by lt i j gt ON The SENSe FUNCtion OFF command switches the input channel specified by n or the addition of two input channels specified by lt i j gt OFF The SENSe FUNCtion STATe query reports whether the specified input channel n or the addition of the input channels lt i j gt is ON or OFF COMMAND REFERENCE 4 79 The parameters XTIMe VOLTage lt n gt and XTIMe VOLTage SUM lt i j gt are of the type lt string_data gt specified between double or single quotes Execution error 221 Settings conflict is generated if the execution of a command causes the last input channel or the addition of two input channels to be turned off In the analog mode the added trace e g
44. Send TRIGger TYPE VIDeo Selects TV video triggering Send gt TRIGger VIDeo FIELd SELect ALL Selects video lines trigger mode Send gt TRIGger VIDeo LINE 123 Selects video line number 123 Send TRIGger VIDeo FIELd SELect NUMBer Selects video field triggering Line number 123 selects field1 field1 2 lines 1 312 Send gt TRIGger VIDeo FIELd NUMBer 2 Selects video field2 trigger mode As a result the video line number is automatically switched to 435 123 625 2 Send TRIGger VIDeo LINE 325 Selects video line number 325 Send TRIGger VIDeo FIELd NUMBer 1 Selects the video field1 trigger mode As a result the video line number is automatically switched to 13 325 625 2 Front panel compliance The TRIGger VIDeo FIELd SELect and TRIGger VIDeo FIELd NUMBer com mands are the remote equivalent of the front panel TRIGGER MAIN TB tv field1 field2 lines softkey menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 129 TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo FORMat TYPE LPFRame TRIGger STARt VIDeo FORMat TYPE LPFRame TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo FORMat TYPE TRIGger STARt VIDeo FORMat TYPE Syntax TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo FORMat T YPE LPF Rame lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo FORMat TYPE PAL SCAM SECAM NTSC HDTV Alias TRIGger STARt VIDeo FORMat TYPE LPFRame lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger STARt VIDeo FORMat TYPE PAL SCAM SEC
45. Syntax INPut lt n gt POLarity NORMal INVerted n 2 4 Note Input 4 is not applicable for PM33x0B Query form INPut lt n gt POLarity n 2 4 Response NORM INV Description The INPut n POLarity command sets the polarity of the signal on the input channels two and four The polarity can be set to NORMal default or INVerted inverted signal After a RST command the polarity is NORMal Example Send RST Resets the instrument Send CONFigure AC 82 Configures channel 2 SendE gt SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe VOLTage2 Sets channel 2 ON Send INPut2 COUPling DC Sets DC input coupling on Send INPut2 POLarity INVerted Sets INV CH2 on Send READ DC 2 Requests DC channel 2 Read DC value Reads inverted DC value Front panel compliance The INPut lt n gt POLarity command is the remote equivalent of the front panel INV keys 4 66 COMMAND REFERENCE INSTrument NSELect INSTrument SELect Syntax INSTrument NSELect lt NRf gt MAXimum INSTrument SELect DIGital ANALog lt NRf gt 1 2 1 MINimum digital mode ANALOG key is activated 2 The analog mode is activated DIGital The digital mode ANALOG key is activated ANALog The analog mode is activated Query form INSTrument NSELect MINimum MAXimum Response 1 2 1 The digital mode ANALOG key is active This is also returned when MAXimum is specified 2 The analog mod
46. VERT MENU menu After a RST command the filter is turned OFF Example Send INPut FILTer ON Turns the filter ON Front panel compliance The INPut n FILTer LPASs STATe command is the remote equivalent of the front panel BW LIMIT option in the VERT MENU menu 4 64 COMMAND REFERENCE INPut lt n gt IMPedance Syntax INPut lt n gt IMPedance lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum n 11121314 lt NRf gt 50 1E6 lt MINimum gt Equals 5 00E 01 500 lt MAXimum gt Equals 1 00E 06 1 MQ Note Channel 3 is not applicable for PM33x0B Query form INPut n IMPedance MINimum MAXimum n 11213 4 Response 5 00E 01 1 00E 06 If lt MINimum gt was specified 5 00E 01 500 is returned If lt MAXimum gt was specified 1 00E 06 1 MQ is returned Description The input impedance of channel n is set according to the impedance parameter specified The impedance can be specified low 500 or high 1 After a RST command the impedance is 1 Restrictions The impedance of the following input channels is fixed at 1 MO channels of the PM3384B CombiScopes instruments Channel 4 of the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments Example Send INPut2 IMPedance 50 Selects 50Q input impedance for channel 2 Front panel compliance The INPut n IMPedance command is the remote equivalent of the front panel 500 option in the VERT MENU menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 65 INPut lt n gt POLarity
47. VOLTage 1 XTIMe VOLTage1 2 4 INPut2 VOLTage2 XTIMe VOLTage2 SWEep 4 INPut3 gt VOLTage3 XTIMe VOLTage3 4 4 INPut4 VOLTage4 XTIMe VOLTage4 Main Time Base ST7159 Figure 3 15 Signal conditioning 3 7 4 AC DC ground coupling The INPut lt n gt COUPling command allows you to set the vertical input coupling at AC DC or GROund for each input channel separately After a RST command all input channels are DC coupled PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 INPut COUPling AC 1 Sets channel 1 AC coupled CALL Send 0 8 INPut2 COUPling GROund 1 Setschannel2 ground coupled 3 40 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 7 2 Input filtering The INPut FILTer command allows you to turn the common low pass filter bandwidth limiter on or off for all input channels at the same time The cutoff frequency is fixed at 20 MHz After RST command the filter is turned off PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 INPut FILTer ON 1 Turns the filter on CALL Send 0 8 INPut FILTer FREQuency 1 Requests for the filter frequency response CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the filter frequency PRINT Filter freq response Prints Filter freq 2 00E 407 3 7 3 Input impedance The INPut lt n gt IMPedance command allows you to specify the input impedance low 50 or high 1 for each input channel separately After a RST command the impedance of each input cha
48. bit 7 in the standard status byte is used to generate a service request SRQ when failing waveform is detected If so the failing waveform is read from memory register 3 1 and stored on disk under file name FAILTRAC DAT In this example this is repeated for five failing waveforms Application summary e Enable the pass fail status bit bit 10 value 1024 in the OPERation status register to be reported by sending STATus OPERation ENABle 1024 e Enable the OPERation status event bit bit 7 value 128 in the standard status byte STB to be reported by sending SRE 128 e Enable the SRQ mechanism to generate an interrupt after OPERation event routine ServReq is executed e Open the file FAILTRAC DAT for output e Start pass fail checking by sending DISPlay MENU MEASure Enables display of MEASURE menu SYSTem KEY 6 Selects PASS FAIL SYSTem KEY 5 Sets PASS FAIL at run DISPlay MENU STATe OFF Disables display of MEASURE menu e Let the program execution sleep or do something else to wait for a service request to be generated at the occurrence of a failing waveform e f an SRQ is generated failing waveform do the following Stop pass fail checking by sending DISPlay MENU MEASure Enables display of MEASURE menu SYSTem KEY 6 Selects PASS FAIL SYSTem KEY 5 Sets PASS FAIL at stop Read the failing waveform from memory 3 1 by sending TRACe M3_1 and by reading the response trace data Write the trace data
49. command A command or query string to be sent to the instrument The short form commands are specified in UPPER CASE The additional characters in lower case complete the long form commands e data One or more data characters to be sent to the listener device GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING 2 3 e lt response gt A response string sent by the instrument as a response to query e eot An end of text indication 0 program message to be continued no action 1 end of program message sends End message EOI true e lt term gt A terminate indication 0 response message to be continued no detection of EOL character 256 end of response message stops reading after EOL character e lt timeout gt A time out indication e g 11 1 second 12 3 seconds 13 10 seconds PROGRAM EXAMPLE l ke ee Initial program statements KKK KK REM SINCLUDE c pc gpib 488driv QBDECL BAS Includes GPIB drivers CLS Clears text from PC screen CALL SendIFC 0 Clears the GPIB interface CALL 0 13 Sets time out at 10 seconds PROGRAMMING NOTE The variable contains the number of response bytes including NL after reading a response message using the Receive driver 2 4 GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING 2 2 lnitializing the CombiScope Instrument 2 2 1 How to reset the CombiScope instrument The instrument itself can be reset by sending the RST c
50. menu MEASURE softkeys n 1 6 MEAS 1 amp MEAS 2 MEASure CONFigure READ CONFigure INITiate FETCh SYSTem KEY 110 DISPlay MENU MEASure SYSTem KEY n DIS Play WINDow 1 TEXT lt 1 2 gt DATA MULTIPLY MATHEMATICS key MATH menu MATH MATH1 2 softkeys n 1 6 MATH1 2 ON OFF multiply SYSTem KEY 111 DISPlay MENU MATH SYSTem KEY n CALCulate 1 2 MATH STATe CALCulate 1 2 EMATH EXP Ression PASS FAIL TESTING MATHPLUS xS AV XA CL SYSTem SET 51 PEAK DETECTION key ACQUIRE SYSTem KEY 107 menu ACQUIRE DISPlay MENU ACQuire PEAK DET SENSe SWE ep P DETection POSITION knob POS CH1 2 3 4 knob XPOS CH1 2 3 4 SENSe VOLTage n2 DC RANGe OFFSet none POWER SUPPLY key POWER ON OFF none PRINTING AND PLOTTING IEEE 488 2 amp RS 232 key HARD COPY key UTILITY menu UTILITY PRINT amp PLOT softkeys n 1 6 get hardcopy data real time clock Select hardcopy device SYSTem KEY 113 SYSTem KEY 104 DISPlay MENU UTIL SYSTem KEY n HCOPy DATA SYSTem DATE SYSTem TIME HCOPy DEVice CROSS REFERENCES FUNCTION KEYS MENUS PROBE SCALING MATHPLUS RELATED SCPI COMMAND S xS AV SYSTem SET PROBE UTILITIES key UTILITY menu UTILITY PROBE softkeys n 1 6 g SYSTem KEY 104 DISPlay MENU UTIL SYSTem KEY n REMOTE CONTROL IEEE 488 2 key STATUS LOCAL key UTILITY menu UTILITY REMOTE SETUP softk
51. 1 Fetches the P eak To Peak value CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the PTP value PRINT Peak To Peak LEFTS response 1 CALL Send 0 8 FETCh AMPLitude 1 Fetches the amplitude value CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the amplitude value PRINT Amplitude LEFT response 1 NEXT i USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 1 3 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 1 Introduction This chapter explains how to access the functions of the CombiScope instruments family in a remote programming environment For that purpose the CombiScope instrument is equipped with an IEEE 488 compatible GPIB interface and implements a full SCPI compatible command set which provides an extensive range of remote control facilities Traditionally there was no standard for the remote operation of instruments A wide range of different command sets existed Each set had its own terminology and trade offs based upon the implementations and corresponding limitations of the instrument Similar functions in different instruments were controlled by different commands And vice versa identical commands could easily exist in another instrument to control a different function With new technologies and increasing complexity other programming concepts were introduced This caused programs with identical functions to look different when written for another instrument The remote control of instruments bec
52. 1 Operation completed END IF WEND CALL Send 0 8 FETCh AC 1 Fetches AC RMS value result SPACES 30 CALL Receive 0 8 result 256 Reads AC RMS value PRINT AC RMS value results Prints AC RMS value USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 75 3 15 3 2 Program example using a service request SRQ PROGRAM EXAMPLE In this example the Service Request mechanism is used to detect whether or not a CONFigure AC INITiate operation is completed If completed an SRQ is generated to continue with fetching and printing the AC RMS value SRQ detected 0 ON PEN GOSUB ServReq Defines SRQ routine PEN ON Enables SRQ routine CALL IBTMO 0 13 Timeout at 10 seconds CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Resets the instrument CALL Send 0 8 ESE 1 1 Sets OPC bitin ESR r OP eration Completed is reported in bit 5 ESB of STB after sending CALL Send 0 8 SRE 32 1 Sets ESB bit in SRE register SRQ generation after OPeration Completed is enabled CALL Send 0 8 CONFigure AC 1 Automatic configuration CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 Single initiation CALL Send 0 8 xOPC 1 This command forces the instrumentto setthe OPC bitin the STB when all pending operations have been finished WHILE SRQ detected 0 Do something else while waiting for SRQ continue when SRQ detected 1 WEND CALL Send 0 8 FETCh AC 1 Fetches AC RMS value result SPACES 30 CA
53. 1 lt gt Non terminal A non terminal is a message element symbol whose syntax specification is defined elsewhere Example A node can be specified as INPut lt n gt The definition of n 1 2 is specified at another line or even somewhere else 2 Default This means that the syntax may or may not contain the message element in between the square brackets without changindheemanticameaningExample MEASure VOLTage DC means that MEASure VOLTage DC is the same as MEASure or MEASure VOLTage or MEASure DC Repetition Specifies that the message element in between the curly brackets may be repeated 0 or more times Example lt parameter gt lt parameter gt specifies acomma separated sequence of one or more lt parameter gt s COMMAND REFERENCE 4 3 Notes 1 A space character that needs to be part of a message is specified as SP Spaces within a syntax specification that are not specified as SP are used for formatting purposes to improve the readability they don t have any semantical meaning Note The only exception to this rule is the program header separator which separates the header from the parameter part in a message For reasons of readability this required syntactical element is not specified in any syntax definition Sending a SP in between the header and parameter part will satisfy this requirement Example The syntax specification INPut STATe ON requires a SP character in bet
54. 1 II TATus QUEStionable P TRansition TATus QUEStionable NTRansition TATus QUEue NEXTP TATus P RESet YSTem ERRor STATUS SCREEN key STATUS LOCAL SYSTem KEY 201 SUBTRACT MATHEMATICS key MATH menu MATH softkeys n z1 6 MATH1 2 ON OFF subtract SYSTem KEY 111 DISPlay MENU MATH SYSTem KEY n CALCulate 1 2 MATH STATe CALCulate 1 2 EMATH EXP Ression S ynchronization of controller instruments and xWAI TEXT OFF key TEXT OFF DIS Play MENU STATe SYSTem KEY 801 CROSS REFERENCES FUNCTION KEYS MENUS TIMEBASE MODES key TB MODE menu TB MODE softkeys n 1 6 AUTO TRIG SINGLE key SINGLE ARM D indicator MULTI ROLL REAL TIME ONLY RELATED SCPI COMMAND S SYSTem KEY 409 DISPlay MENU TBMode SYSTem KEY n INITiate CONTinuous ON TRIGger SOUR IMMediate INITiate CONTinuous ON TRIGger SOURce INTernal lt n gt INITiate IM Mediate SYSTem KEY 311 none none SENSe SWEep REALtime S TATe 22 TIME MEASUREMENTS key MEASURE menu MEASURE softkeys n 1 6 MEAS 1 amp MEAS 2 frequency period pulse width negative pulse width positive rise time fall time duty cycle negative duty cycle positive time of the first max value time of the first min value SYSTem KEY 110 DISPlay MENU MEAS ure SYSTem KEY n DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT lt 1 2 gt DATA MEAS ure FREQuency MEAS ure PERiod MEAS ure NWID
55. 3 2 The rise time is expressed in seconds RTIMe is an alias of RISE TIME lt measure_parameters gt lt reference_low gt lt NRf gt DEFault Range 0 100 Default value 10 Specifies the REFerence LOW level as a percentage of the HIGH value See figure 3 2 The unit of reference low is volt lt reference_high gt lt NRf gt DEFault Range 0 100 Default value 90 Specifies the REFerence HIGH level as a percentage of the HIGH value See figure 3 2 The unit of lt reference_high gt is volt COMMAND REFERENCE 4 71 expected time NHf DEFault Specifies the time value that is expected to be measured The unit of expected time is second time resolution NHf DEFault Specifies the resolution of the time measurement to be executed The unit of time resolution is second expected frequency NHf DEFault Specifies the frequency value that is expected to be measured The unit of expected frequency is hertz frequency resolution lt NRf gt DEFault Specifies the resolution of the frequency measurement to be executed The unit of frequency resolution is hertz reference middle lt NRf gt DEFault Range 0 100 Default value 50 Specifies the REFerence MIDDIle level as a percentage of the HIGH value See figure 3 2 The unit of reference middle is volt expected period lt NRf gt DEFault Specifies the value of the period that is expect
56. 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 4 1 Appendix B 1 Appendix B 2 The instrument model for CombiScope instruments Pulse characteristics The trigger model for acquisitions DC Coupling AC Coupling LF Reject HF Reject Pre triggering Post triggering The trace acquisition flow Relation between screen position and trace value Relation between screen position and amplitude value The Trigger Model during acquisition averaging Input channel control Signal conditioning Definition of a signal period Post processing control Post processing feed definition Relation between screen position and FFT value Trace memory control Screen layout of display functions Hardcopy of screen on printer plotter The status reporting model for CombiScope instruments The Operation Status structure The Questionable Status structure Local remote control SYSTem COMMunicatie SERial Cross reference front panel keys commands Cross reference softkey menus commands C 6 MANUAL CONVENTIONS C 5 Documents Referenced 1 General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 1 Order number 4822 872 80193 SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Order number 4822 872 80194 SCPI in the German language Standard Kommandos f r Programmierbare Instrumenten Order number 4822 872 80174 SCPI in the French language Commandes Standard pour Instruments Programmables Order number 4822 872 80175 STANDA
57. 3 62 3 63 Sng ARE detta ien Al e rob eg SUR ae 3 63 TBmode cuts peel Pe erp eid Velut 4 23 4 24 TEMPerattre x res ERE SERRE o Rire Ata x ck s 3 72 Terminal Symbols 2 eius eee eg Dx RR pegas 4 1 TITIO So rrr se e a REIS UE ee i 3 68 Time DASE sete ng eii ats Ret Les 3 42 3 48 4 83 B 25 Time of the first max B 25 Time of the first min B 25 Touch hold amp B 25 iacta bu farum pe to puedo a Spe pedo 2 6 A 5 Trace 1 3 29 Trace administration 4 111 Trace dump data i ocu cg eevee exo rd 4 59 Trace intensity ngos c empto D Re ve Iu depu Ae 4 105 Trace length 4 113 4 114 B 17 B 25 Trace 3 56 3 58 3 59 3 60 4 55 4 109 ee 4 57 4 84 4 112 4 114 25 Trace point frequencies 3 53 Trace point value iR eet Rx RE RAP EE 3 50 Trace response 2 6 Trace sampl
58. 55 4 63 4 117 2 55 20 Liu pp eed per bade bt 3 81 4 23 B 21 Main Time Base 3 21 3 42 4 23 4 80 4 83 4 85 4 105 4 119 B 21 Master summary status 4 27 Math scares are Y ert ea 3 46 3 48 4 21 4 36 4 37 B 22 3 62 4 49 MATEHT 2 eR ee at a aa E RD dor E Y CS 4 105 gt lt PCR NER RR ERE 4 27 VIE CERA SER ORE 3 62 B 28 etate dia a ub cfe 4 68 4 69 MEAS1 nese acts anes ars d p peru d E d e ett 3 62 3 64 A 5 B 28 eatis saei e doute e 3 62 3 64 A 5 B 28 Measure 3 9 3 12 4 12 4 67 Measure 3 9 3 12 4 12 4 67 4 70 MEASurement 1 271 Senin outs n RASSE ber 4 105 Measurement instructions 2 9 3 8 3 4 3 8 3 11 Measurement values A 5 INDEX 1 7 Measuring signal A 2 3 56 3 58 3 60 3 78 4 22 4 25 4 111 Memory tacere ena xu RAE RERO REA Rena 4 33 Meri elation EC eG 3 61 3 65 4 46 4 47 Meta symbols teas Sei e ab e 4 1
59. 8 STATus PRESet 1 Presets the enable register filters 3 74 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 15 3 How to enable status reporting The principle of using the status reporting mechanism is explained by showing two program examples In the first example the standard Status Byte STB is checked to signal operation completed In the second example the SRQ mechanism is used to signal operation completed by generating a Service Request 3 15 3 1 Program example using the status byte STB PROGRAM EXAMPLE In this example the standard status byte STB is checked to detect whether or not a CONFigure AC INITiate operation is completed If completed the program continues by fetching and printing the AC RMS value CALL IBTMO 0 13 Timeout at 10 seconds CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Resets the instrument CALL Send 0 8 ESE 1 1 Enables OPC bit 0 in ESE r OP eration Completed is reported in bit 5 ESB of the STB after sending OPC CALL Send 0 8 CONFigure AC 1 Automatic configuration CALL Send 0 8 OPC 1 This command forces the instrument to set the OPC bit when all pending operations have been finished CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 Single initiation ESB bit set 0 result SPACES 3 WHILE ESB bit set 0 CALL Send 0 8 STB 1 Requests for the STB CALL Receive 0 8 result 256 Reads the STB IF VAL result AND 32 THEN ESB bit 5 value 32 ESB bit set
60. 93 010308 10 ii 0 0223607 20 0 30 791813 86 989708 5 0 0111803 26 020632 36 812444 80 96907 2 0 0044721 33 97947 44171282 73 01023 Note PROGRAM EXAMPLE on the next page shows how it is programmed TRACE POINT FREQUENCIES The horizontal frequency values in Hz per point are calculated from the trace sample index point number of the sample in the trace the acquisition length TRACe POINts and the MTB calculated from the SENSe SWEep TIME by the following equation Fs sample index 1250 TRACe POINts MTB 50 Restriction Only trace sample data can be queried from trace memories no trace administration data such as acquisition length and MTB value This means that these values must be queried from the actual input channel signal which is taken as the source for the FFT process So take care that the acquisition length nor the MTB is changed between activating the post processing function and reading the trace memory where the post processing trace is stored 3 54 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS PROGRAM EXAMPLE The following program example converts a relative or absolute FFT trace of 512 samples of 1 or 2 bytes from the signal on channel 1 via the 1 feature as follows e Before running this program first make the FFT selections desired via the front panel such as gt MATH1 on and fft CURSORS on and m1 1 MATH PARAM FILTER hamm
61. Boolean CALibration ALL response 0 1 CONFigure see Note 1 2 and 3 VOLTage measure function voltage parameters measure parameters channel list COMMAND REFERENCE 4 7 COMMAND PARAMETERS NOTES DISPlay BRIGhtness lt NRf gt MAXimum MINimum NRf 0 00 1 00 MENU TBMode TRIGger DMODe SETups CURSors ACQuire DISPlay MATH MEASure SAVE RECall UTIL VERTical STATE lt Boolean gt WINDow 1 TEXT lt n gt lt gt 1 2 10 11 12 13 20 21 30 40 51 52 60 61 query only WINDow2 TEXT 1 CLEAR no query DATA lt string_data gt lt block_data gt STATe Boolean FETCh see Note 1 2 3 and 4 VOLTage response NR3 measure function voltage parameters measure parameters channel list trace list FORMat type dength INTeger 8 for 8 bit samples INTeger 16 for 16 bit samples HCOPy DATA query only response indefinite block DEVice HPGL HP7440 HP7550 7475 HP7470A PM8277 PM8278 FX80 101500 HP2225 HPLASER HP540 DUMP 1 INITiate IMMediate no query CONTinuous Boolean 4 8 COMMAND REFERENCE COMMAND PARAMETERS NOTES INP ut n lt n gt 1 2 3 4 COUPIing AC DC GROund FILTer LPASs STATe Boolean FREQuency query only response 2E 7 1
62. FORMat command This gives you the possibility to define samples of 8 bits 1 byte or 16 bits 2 bytes A FORMat command specifies the number of sample bits for all channels and memory registers Example Send gt FORMat INT 16 Formats 16 bits samples The format of the trace response data is as follows 4nx xfb bs NL NewLine code 10 decimal checksum byte over all trace bytes trace sample data bytes see Note trace data format byte see Note number of trace bytes fbb bbs number of digits of x x Note If f 8 decimal each trace sample is one byte 8 bits If f 16 decimal each trace sample is two bytes 16 bits i e most significant byte msb least significant byte Isb Example 41026 lt 16 gt msb 1 lt lsb 1 gt msb 512 Isb 512 checksum lt 10 gt trace sample 512 trace sample 1 decimal 16 number of trace bytes N number of digits of N GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING 2 7 2 4 1 How to acquire a single shot trace In the program example a single shot trace acquisition of 8192 8 bit samples is done with a probe connected to input channel 1 The trace sample bytes are read from the GPIB as string characters The number of response bytes and the number of samples are printed The TRIGger SOURce command is used to specify input channel 1 as a trigger source The TRIGger LEVel command is used to reset the trigg
63. Group Execute Trigger code The MEASure and READ queries do not allow you to do so because such a setup causes a query error With the INITiate IMMediate and FETCh concept it is possible to meet the requirements of such applications Example CONFigure AC Configures the instrument to measure the AC RMS voltage TRIGger SOURce BUS Specifies that the acquisition is to be triggered by GET or TRG INITiate Starts the measurement process TRG Triggers the acquisition FETCh AC Determines and returns the AC RMS value USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 17 3 3 8 Fetching characteristics from memory traces The FETCh query not only allows you to determine a characteristic from the last acquired waveform it also allows you to calculate a signal characteristic from a waveform that is stored in a trace memory element Example FETCh RISE TIME M3_4 Calculates and returns the default rise time from a waveform that is stored in trace memory MS 4 FETCh PERiod M4_1 Determines and returns the period of the waveform that is stored in trace memory 4 1 Notice that such a FETCh query operates properly only when there is valid waveform data stored in the trace memory PROGRAM EXAMPLE In this example the signal acquired via channel 2 is stored in memory register 1 The AC RMS peak to peak and amplitude values of the stored signal are fetched and printed DIM response AS STRING 10 CALL Send 0 8 CONFig
64. If CH1 CH2 is on and CH3 and CH4 are off CH1 CH2 cannot be programmed off by sending SENSE FUNCtion OFF XTIME VOLTage SUM 1 2 Instead send the command SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIME VOLTage2 X Sets CH2 on INPut SENSe TRACe FUNCtion o OFF memory Q1 INPut 1 VOLTage 1 r T XTIMe VOLTage1 J OFF 2 INPut2 VOLTage2 A XTIMe VOLTage2 eee CH2 SWEep OFF 3 INPut3 VOLTage3 A XTIMe VOLTage3 eee CH3 OFF 4 INPut4 VOLTage4 A XTIMe VOLTage4 oe CH4 Main Time Base Figure 3 14 Input channel control PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe VOLTage SUM 1 2 1 Sets CH1 CH2 on CALL Send 0 8 SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIMe VOLTage2 1 Sets CH2 on CH1 CH2 off CH1 remains off USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 39 3 7 Signal Conditioning The INPut subsystem allows you to condition the input signals such as AC DC GROund coupling input filtering and input impedance selection In the digital mode the SENSe VOLTage lt n gt RANGe AUTO command allows you to enable autoranging of the attenuation for each of the input channels lt n gt separately INPut SENSe FUNCtion o OFF 1 INPut 1
65. Reed Rd A 11 EXAPPA52 BAS TubeWeisebeu ves A 11 5 22 des dde aed ea a eee aT A 12 EXAPPBST BAS estt nut At S MAG ME Re SE A 11 EXAPPB52 BAS suse Id UR e IA RW arid p vu A 11 EXAPPB59 BAS oe eC deri o bobo Por buit A 12 EXONVTRG BAS 3 35 3 54 EXGETSTA BAS cesa eal aeree SW Nee m Vds 2 1 Expression program D 2 Extended memory 4 21 4 33 4 109 4 111 External bos erc ever IR d 3 20 3 28 3 80 4 79 4 125 EX Ternal triggers eas Rit E b e E RATS 4 21 F puc 3 63 Fall x15 rnb ae Dr gU hc x v ERES 4 68 4 72 B 28 EE bete ele ER 3 62 B 25 Falling 2 B 28 Falling presh ot s esre Sate go Atos ig te B 28 Feed hen we neha ees 3 45 4 33 one eae E gt 3 46 B 7 B 20 2 3 51 FFT trace sample 3 54 FET amplus i ra ker Rie Lita fe IER fa tote MY cR TUR ECRIRE 3 63 wie ee IE UE 3 63 triggering
66. Request STB Generation 4 MSS read by STB Logical OR SRE ST7235 A bit value of 1 indicates an enable condition and a bit value of 0 indicates a disable condition To make sure that the service request line is activated only when a new reason for service occurs the status byte is not updated after a SRQ Service Request has occurred until e A serial poll is done e for service no longer exists e g after reading the contents of the event register Example Send SRE B100000 This sets bit 5 ESB in the Service Request Enable Register COMMAND REFERENCE 4 27 STB Status Byte Syntax STB Response integer Description The STB query reports the contents of the Status Byte register STB The range of the 8 bit STB contents is between 0 and 255 decimal The Status Byte Register contains the summary status of all overlaying status registers and queues RQS read by Serial Poll RQS epe pale oo o MSS MSS read by STB ST7236 Notes OPER OPERation status bit 7 Contains the summary of the OPERation status register structure RQS Requested Service bit 6 Indicates that the device requests for service i e SRQ 1 in the GPIB interface It differs from the MSS bit in that the RQS bit is cleared after a serial poll It is set true again only when a new event occurs that requires service
67. Send INITiate CONTinuous ON Sets Auto run mode Send SENSe VOLTage2 RANGe AUTO ON Autoranging CH2 Send SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIMe VOLTage SUM 1 2 Switches CH1 CH2 on The result is that the addition of input channels 1 and 2 is switched on 1 2 and autoranging attenuator channel 2 switched off Front panel compliance The SENSe VOLTage lt n gt RANGe AUTO command is the remote equivalent of the four front panel AUTO RANGE keys one for each channel COMMAND REFERENCE 4 87 SENSe VOLTage n DC RANGe OFFSet Syntax SENSe VOLTage lt n gt DC RANGe OFFSet lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum lt n gt 11121314 Note Channel and 4 not applicable for lt NRf gt The vertical offset for channel lt n gt in volts MINimum Selects the minimum possible vertical offset MAXimum Selects the maximum possible vertical offset Query form SENSe VOLTage lt n gt DC RANGe OFFSet MINimum MAXimum Response NR3 NR3 The vertical offset for channel n in volts If MINimum was specified the minimum possible value is returned If MAXimum was specified the maximum possible value is returned Description Controls the vertical offset for an input channel The vertical offset for channel n is expressed in volts If a detectable probe is attached the offset value is considered to be at the probe tip otherwise at the BNC plug After a RST command the vertical offset fo
68. Send 0 8 TRACe COPY M2 1 1 1 result is that the acquisition traces of the channels 1 and 3 are copied to M2 1 respectively M2 3 om CALL Send 0 8 TRACe COPY M3_1 M2_1 1 result is that the previously stored traces in M2 1 and M2 3 are copied to 1 respectively m3 3 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 59 3 10 3 Writing data to trace memory The TRACe command allows you to write data from the controller into a memory register The following possibilities are available e Write a previously read trace using the TRACe query Example Send gt TRACe CH3 Queries for trace Read lt trace block Reads trace data block Send gt gt TRACe M2 3 trace block Writes data block to 2 The result is that trace area M2_3 is filled with the acquisition trace of channel 3 Programming note The fixed command part TRACe 2 3 and the variable trace block must be sent separately So no EOI End Or Identify detection in between Also the trace block must be sent without EOI detection and detection of the EOL End Of Line code because the trace block could contain the EOL character e g code 10 for CR Write a trace of identical constants range 32767 32767 Example Send gt TRACe M2 4 1028 71028 1024 4 0404 hex This command fills all memory register M2 4 locations with the constant 0404 hexadecimal for 16 bit samples and with 04 hexadecim
69. Syntax SENSe SWEep REALtime STATe Boolean Query form SENSe SWEep REALtime STATe Response 0 1 0 Real time mode switched off 1 Real time mode switched on Description Switches the real time mode of the acquisition on or off If the real time sampling mode is switched on the MTB range is limited to sequential sampling from 250 nanoseconds through 200 seconds per division for MTB ranges refer to the SENSe SWEep TIME command In the analog mode error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated After a RST command the real time mode is switched off Example Send RST Resets the instrument Send gt SENSe SWEep REALtime ON Sets real time sampling on Send TRIGger SOURce INTernall LEVel 1 SLOPe EITHer Sets the following trigger settings source internal channel 1 level 0 1V slope either pos or neg Send gt INITiate Initiates a single acquisition Send gt READ AC Reads AC RMS Read lt AC RMS voltage Front panel compliance The SENSe SWEep REALtime command is the remote equivalent of the front panel REALTIME ONLY option of the TB MODE menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 88 SENSe SWEep TIME Syntax SENSe SWEep TIME lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum lt NRf gt The sweep time in seconds MINimum Selects the minimum possible sweep time MAXimum Selects the maximum possible sweep time Query form SENSe SWEep TIME MINimum MAXimum R
70. USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 37 The following diagram shows the possible states of the acquisition process when averaging is on and the way they are affected by commands IDLE state RST ABORt power on INIT or ON INITiated state INIT CONT ON Wait for AVERage state Y Wait for trigger Wait for complete 1 1 acquisition 1 averaging ST7189 Figure 3 13 Trigger Model during acquisition averaging 3 38 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 6 Channel Selection Input channels can be switched on or off by using the SENSe FUNCtion ON or SENSe FUNCtion OFF commands An input channel is selected by specifying the parameter XTIMe VOLTage lt n gt where the numeric suffix n specifies the input channel number After a RST command channel 1 is turned on and the other channels off including the EXTernal input for PM33x0A Addition of two channels can be selected by specifying the XTIMe VOLTage SUM parameter as follows Addition of CH1 and CH2 XTIMe VOLTage SUM 1 2 gt Addition of CH3 and 4 XTIMe VOLTage SUM 3 4 Note Enabling of the addition of input channels e g CH34 CHA automatically switches channel 3 and channel 4 on Disabling of the addition of two channels e g CH3 CH4 automatically switches channel 3 channel 4 off provided at least one channel remains on Programming tip
71. Y IRA 3 50 3 52 4 49 Rte cus iud ac ce iet ore nro 3 50 3 52 4 49 DG ecu E en Eo pened ped 3 62 4 62 4 67 4 116 4 118 B 26 B 28 INDEX 1 3 DG Ccoupling z m Rot Bed Matas Aid 3 21 3 22 4 117 Decimal numeric program D 2 Detault oci t PERPE 4 2 4 70 4 71 Definite block ED ESRB PERPE FE EI 4 4 Delay 4 ise 22 tat bode UR Oe Lupe dere 3 62 B 9 B 19 Delayed time base 4 23 4 105 B 19 DERivallVe Ini E ae 3 46 3 48 4 32 B 19 Destin tion trace Rage oda Rec ie eee oe ET 4 109 Device dependent status 4 27 4 92 DIF Ferential eds pup Rep 3 46 3 48 4 32 Differentiate eim ERIT a bed bets See ieee ace RR B 19 actuate es chet ard ats M he le Bee 4 4 Digital mode 2 4 3 71 4 23 4 43 4 55 4 66 4 73 4 74 4 122 B 19 Displays ys Siw eee eee als 3 61 3 81 4 24 4 52 4 58 4 105 B 5 Display trace 4 105 OV ta ave ea eh trac ee 3 63 DIBTUNCUIONS 5 she 3 81 DUMP MT ICM ea Rex 4 58 4 59 Duty cycle dux hate dite Ra eee EE 3 62 4 69 B 25 Dm 3 63 e E tae
72. a TAa RR HE ua 4 97 2 5 ewe eR Ma ien dit RR E du e caeca 2 10 Repetition zi eee eU ered eine dene ee ceo ARE EI eR aus 4 2 Repetitive tur atur ts tati viis tA ope s Erb 2 8 3 30 4 76 Request to send oce dee meter ee deep tend 4 97 Requested service 4 27 xm aed ear 2 4 3 73 3 78 4 23 dedere AREE eun ea 4 70 4 72 28 R Se tlImie s x te ay ha ea Td Rad 3 62 B 25 Rise time 4 Rising overshoot s e 28 Rising 28 BMS penu 3 13 3 16 3 62 4 67 4 73 28 Roll EL ees Ru eei eb uu 3 81 4 23 B 25 HS 232 C Son ut ERAT LER dae eU he ee die tre 4 97 4 99 r CREE RP 23 5 Ending 3 49 SaVe dte due uude iUis I eee a els 3 78 4 25 lo nM C EA 3 1 3 2 SCGPIVerSIOD 25 525 eret vieta e qe ed 4 108 ses E xu 3 61 3 66 4 51 23 27 Screen pictures oe f Ec REX Syn ee A 9 1 10 INDEX Screen
73. an internal calibration did not complete successfully This bit is reset after power on and after successful calibration Overload 50 This bit is set by the instrument when any 500 input terminator is overloaded This bit is reset after power on or if none of the input terminators is overloaded Table 3 4 Questionable Status bits USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 78 3 15 2 How to reset the status data The CLS command allows you to clear the following status data structures e All event status registers such as the following Standard event status register ESR Status byte register STB Operation event status register STATus OPERation EVENt questionable event status register STATus QUEStionable EVENt e Error event queue The STATus PRESet command presets the filters and enable register of the operation and questionable status data in such a way that device dependent events are reported The result is as follows STATUS REGISTER DATA STRUCTURE PRESET VALUE OPERation ENABle register 0000 hex PTRansition filter 7FFF hex NTRansition filter 0000 hex QUEStionable ENABle register 0000 hex PTRansition filter 7FFF hex NTRansition filter 0000 hex Note A HST command does not affect the contents of event registers event enable registers output queues transition filters PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 CLS 1 Clears the event registers error event queue CALL Send 0
74. buffer to the opened file FAILTRAC DAT Start pass fail checking again by sending SYSTem KEY 5 Sets PASS FAIL at run DISPlay MENU STATe OFF Disables display of MEASURE menu Repeat this test 5 times e Routine ServReg does the following Serial polls the status byte to reset the SRQ mechanism Reads the OPERation event status register to clear the FAIL bit Sets the SRQ detected flag to signal that an SRQ interrupt occurred Application program Note Q uick BASIC program is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPA53 BAS The program code that runs under TestTeam Plus and LabWindows is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPB53 BAS CROSS REFERENCES APPENDIX B CROSS REFERENCES B 1 Cross Reference Front Panel Keys Commands The front panel picture is copied from the operation guide showing the SCPI commands corresponding to front panel keys CONF AC Gn SENS VOLT1 RANG OFFS SENS VOLT1 RANG PTP ON SENS FUNC OFF XTIM VOLT1 STAT SENS VOLT1 RANG AUTO AC INP1 COUP DC GRO SENS SWE OFFS TIME CAL DIG CAL INST ANAL TRIG HOLD INIT CONT AUTOSET CAL SETUPS UTILITY ANOLOG ACQUIR SAVE ECALL MEASURE MATH DISPLAY HARD COPY F tJ FL S HCOP DATA STATUS TRACK im uoLblorr TRIGGER MAGNIF
75. but the trade off is less flexibility Lower levels provide more flexibility by offering more control over the instrument functionality This requires more knowledge about the remote operation of your instrument The measurement instructions specify a particular task in terms of the expected signal and the desired result The instructions refer to the signal characteristics of the signal being measured This makes them independent from the implementation of the instrument functions For example when the instruction MEASure FREQuency is executed it is not important whether this frequency is measured by precisely counting the signal period or if it is calculated from a sampled waveform For this reason the measurement instructions provide the best compatibility among different types of instruments But as a trade off the compatibility decreases when more flexibility is needed and lower measurement instruction levels are used 3 31 MEASure query This is the easiest instruction to use and provides the best compatibility However it does not offer access to the full capability of the CombiScope instrument The MEASure query configures the instrument for optimal settings starts the data acquisition and returns the result in one operation The signal characteristics that can be acquired in this way are shown in figure 3 2 Example MEASure AC This query measures the RMS voltage of the AC component at the default input channel 1
76. by permitted MTB values only particular values can be specified with this command Refer to the SENSe SWEep TIME command reference for a detailed specification of these values Together with the number of trace points TRACe POINTs the SENSe SWEep TIME command determines the Main Time Base MTB MTB is expressed in seconds per division Since there are 50 points in each division the MTB can be calculated from the following equation MTB 50 SENSe SWEep TIME TRACe POINts 1 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 43 PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 SENSe SWEep TIME 1 Requests sweep time CALL Receive 0 8 STIMES 256 Reads sweep time CALL Send 0 8 TRACe POINts CH1 1 Requests number of trace points CALL Receive 0 8 TPOINTS 256 Reads number of trace points SWETIM VAL STIMES Converts string to variable TRAPOI VAL TPOINTSS Converts string to variable MTB 50 SWETIM TRAPOI 1 Calculates PRINT Main Time Base MTB Prints the MTB In a similar way the time value Ts that is associated with a trace sample point can be calculated from the following expression Ts sample index SENSe SWEep TIME TRACe POINts 1 where sample index is the point number of the sample in the trace 3 8 3 Real time acquisition Since there is a physical limit to the maximum sample rate of the ADC traces with a duration which is less than 200 ns cannot be sampled withi
77. by speci fying a predefined name DIGital ANALog or the corresponding number 1 digital 2 analog PROGRAM EXAMPLE l KKK KK Initialize and change the operating mode of the CombiScope instrument okk ke e CALL Send 0 8 INSTrument ANALog 1 Switches to analog mode CALL Send 0 8 INSTrument NSELect 1 1 Switches back to digital mode GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING 2 5 2 3 Error Reporting Instrument errors are usually caused by programming or setting errors They are reported by the instrument during the execution of each command To make sure that a program is running properly you must query the instrument for possible er rors after every functional command This is done by sending the SYSTem ERRor query or the STATus QUEue query to the instrument followed by reading the response message However through this practice the same error reporting statements must be repeated after sending each SCPI command This is not always practical Therefore one of the following approaches is advised 1 Send the SYSTem ERRor or STATus QUEue query and read the instrument response message after every group of commands that functionally belong to each other 2 Program an error reporting routine and call this routine after each command or group of commands For an example of an error reporting routine refer to section 3 14 4 1 3 Program an error reporting routine and use the Service Request SRQ Ge
78. dual slope triggering on off trigger level trigger source CH1 2 3 4 composite line external trigger delay value trigger coupling AC DC LF reject HF reject TV system PAL HDTV NTSC SECAM pattern glitch condition ENTER EXIT RANGE gt 1 lt 2 trigger pattern CH1 2 3 4 TV line number pattern glitch trigger time T1 2 SUMMARY SYSTEM SETTINGS 18 19 20 32 33 49 50 51 Delayed timebase settings length 13 bytes delayed timebase trigger mode edge TV trigger level delayed timebase on off trigger slope pos neg noise suppression on off trigger source CH1 2 3 4 mtb trigger delay trigger coupling AC DC LF reject HF reject Event trigger delay settings length 9 bytes event counter event trigger level event trigger source CH1 2 3 4 event triggering on off event trigger slope pos neg event trigger coupling AC DC SCPI trigger source length 4 bytes SCPI trigger source IEEE bus immediate CH1 2 3 4 Cursor settings length 33 bytes voltage time cursors on off rise time on off cursor control volt time Vpp on off rise time 10 90 20 80 voltage readout Vpp Vp Vp readout on off delta V absolute V1 amp V2 voltage ratio delta T 1 delta T time ratio time phase Vdc X cursor 1 2 Y cursor 1 2 X Y ratio cursor source CH1 2 3 4 track amp delta control ref amp delta control degrees cursors horizontal and vertical selection V1 amp V2 readout dBm dBuV Vrms read
79. examples are included with each command description ONLY THE COMMAND STRING IS GIVEN No other programming details are shown because the method used to send the command string differs depending upon the GPIB drivers and programming language used Notation used Send command string Example Send OPT This means send the query OPT to the instrument Read lt response string Example Read lt IEEE 0 0 MP 0 0 This means read the response IEEE 0 0 MP 0 0 from the instrument 4 14 COMMAND REFERENCE Errors Specifies possible error numbers plus their meaning The error number plus the corresponding text can be requested by sending the SYSTem ERROR or STATus QUEue query Front panel compliance Specifies the compliance with front panel operations PROGRAMMING NOTES e ltis advised to send the commands RST and CLS first before executing the programming examples in this chapter In this way the oscilloscope is reset to default settings RST and the status data cleared CLS e aware of coupled commands during command execution Coupling information is described in the command descriptions Coupling means that an instrument may change other functions or values which are not directly programmed by sending this command Example The vertical sensitivity is derived from the programmed peak to peak value SENSe VOLTage RANGe PTPeak The programmed trigger level TRIGger LEVel is adapte
80. front panel to enable the use of cursors Set the cursor area via the CURSORS softkey menu Send oO READ PTPeak Queries for Peak To Peak measurement within the previously set cursor area Read c lt peak to peak voltage Send 9 FETCh AC Fetches AC RMS value of latest acquisition Head lt AC RMS voltage Example 1 Send gt CONFigure VOLTage AC 0 6 2 Configures AC RMS channel2 expected voltage 600 mV Send gt SENSe AVERage ON Enables averaging Send READ AC 2 Initiates fetches AC RMS value Read lt averaged AC RMS value Send READ AC Q2 Initiates fetches AC RMS value Read averaged AC RMS value Example 2 Send CONFigure VOLTage RISE TIME 0 5 20 80 1E 2 802 Configures the rise time expected voltage 0 5V LOW ref 20 HIGH ref 80 expected time 0 01 seconds channel 2 Send INPut2 COUPling AC Channel 2 becomes AC coupled Send READ RISE TIME 02 Initiates fetches the rise time of the signal on channel 2 Read lt the measured rise time Send FETCh FALL TIME 82 Fetches the fall time of the signal on channel 2 Read lt the measured fall time Errors Executing READ when TRIGger SOURce BUS is selected generates execution error 214 Trigger deadlock 4 76 COMMAND REFERENCE SENSe AVERage STATe Syntax SENSe AVERage STATe lt Boolean gt Query
81. gt 128 then integer byte1 256 256 byte2 Example byte1 255 amp byte2 32 integer 255 256 256 32 224 DIM trace 512 Array of 512 integers DIM response AS STRING 1033 Trace response buffer CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Resets the instrument Sets 16 bit sample data format CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 Single shot initiation CALL Send 0 8 WAI TRACe CH1 1 Queries for channel 1 trace CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the channel 1 trace PRINT Number of trace bytes IBCNT length of trace buffer The contents of the response string of this example will be as follows 41026 16 msb1 lt 501 gt msb512 lt 50512 gt sum 10 nr of digits VAL MID response 2 1 nr of bytes VAL MID response 3 nr of digits 2 PRINT Number of trace bytes nr of bytes sample length ASC MID response 3 nr of digits 1 nr of samples nr of bytes sample length 8 PRINT Number of trace samples nr of samples FOR 1 1 TO nr of samples 2 x i 2 nr of digits Pointer to next sample bytel ASC MID response J 1 Most Significant Byte byte2 ASC MID response J 1 1 LeastSignificant Byte IF bytel 128 THEN trace i bytel 256 byte2 ELSE trace i bytel 256 256 byte2 END IF NEXT i 3 34 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 4 3 3 Conversion to voltage values Screen positio
82. high or too low 8 256 Calibration is not successfully completed 9 512 A 500 input terminator is overloaded 14 16384 Unexpected parameter in measurement instruction other Not used Zero is returned Example Send STATus QUEStionable CONDition Requests for questionable condition Read lt 16 The returned value 16 equals bit 4 set temperature too high low SendE STATus QUEStionable ENABle 16 Enables report of bit 4 TEMPerature in questionable event register Send STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 0 Disables all bit reports from 1 to 0 Send STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 16 Enables report of TEMPerature too high low 0 gt 1 Send STATus QUEStionable EVENt Requests for questionable event Read lt 16 The returned value 16 equals bit 4 set temperature too high low Send STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 0 Disables all bit reports from 0 to 1 Send STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 16 Enables report of TEMPerature within allowed limits 1 gt 0 Send STATus QUEStionable EVENt Requests for questionable event Read lt 16 The returned value 16 equals bit 4 set TEMPerature okay COMMAND REFERENCE 4 95 STATus QUEue NEXT Syntax STATus QUEue NEXT Response error gt lt descriptions error number A predefined number If O zero is returned there are no error
83. is 5 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 49 Scaling can be adjusted with the CURSORS TRACK and delta knobs via the MATHPLUS PARAM menu option PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate INTegral STATe ON 1 Integral CALC1 on CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate2 DERivative POINts 35 1 35 differential points CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate2 DERivative STATe ON 1 Differential CALC2 on 3 9 4 Frequency domain transformations The result of an FFT Fast Fourier Transformation calculation is displayed as a trace of amplitude values vertically versus frequency values horizontally The vertical result can be expressed as a relative or an absolute amplitude value The CALCulate TRANsform FREQuency TYPE command selects between the RELative and ABSolute result The DISPlay WINDow TEXT lt n gt DATA query allows you to read the calculated amplitude and frequency value RELATIVE FFT A relative FFT calculation consists of a frequency Hz and an amplitude in dB relative to the frequency component with the largest amplitude ABSOLUTE FFT An absolute FFT calculation consists of a frequency Hz and an amplitude in dBm dB with respect to 1 milliwatt dBuV dB with respect to 1 microvolt or Vrms Volt RMS as selected via the front panel CURSORS READOUT softkey menu The following FFT window functions can be selected using the CALCulate TRANsform FREQuency WINDow command FFT RECTangular function transforms a re
84. lt n gt INTegral STATe lt Boolean gt lt n gt 1 2 Query form CALCulate lt n gt INTegral STATe Response 0 1 0 Integrate function turned off 1 Integrate function turned on Description This command switches the integrate function on or off The result of the integrate function is stored in M1_n for CALCulate1 and in M2_n for CALCulate2 depen dent on the input source CHn or Mi n n 1 2 3 4 After a RST command the integrate function is turned off Example Send CALCulate INTegral STATe ON Switches the integrate function on Front panel compliance The CALCulate1 CALCulate2 commands use the MATH1 and MATH2 features of the CombiScope instrument 4 36 COMMAND REFERENCE CALCulate lt n gt MATH EXPRession Syntax CALCulate lt n gt MATH EXPRession trace name operation trace name n 1112 trace name A trace name which is a predefined acquisition trace or memory trace acquisition trace CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 memory trace Mi_1 Mi_2 Mi_3 Mi_4 Note 1 8 standard memory i 9 50 extended memory lt operation gt Query form CALCulate lt n gt MATH EXPRession Response trace name operation trace name Description This command specifies the mathematical expression for the MATH function The operation in the command parameter selects the calculate function which can be add subtract or multipl
85. of commands For an example of an error reporting routine refer to section 3 16 4 1 3 Program an error reporting routine and use the Service Request SRQ Generation mechanism to interrupt the execution of the program and to execute the error reporting routine Therefore refer to section 3 16 4 2 3 15 4 1 Error reporting routine Send the SYSTem ERRor or STATus QUEue query and read the instrument response after every group of commands that functionally belong to each other by calling an error reporting routine after each group of commands PROGRAM EXAMPLE DIM response AS STRING 30 CALL Send 0 8 81 1 FOR 1 TO 20 CALL Send 0 8 CALL Receive 0 PRINT AC RMS GOSUB ErrorCheck NEXT i okk ke ke xkxxxx REST OF THE okk ke e END ErrorCheck CALL Send 0 8 CALL Receive 0 PRINT Error RETURN CONFigure AC READ AC 1 8 responses response 256 APPLICATION SYSTem ERRor 1 8 response 256 response Configures for AC RMS Performs 20 measurements Reads the AC RMS value Prints the AC RMS value Checks for instrument errors Queries for a system error Reads the instrument error Prints the instrument error USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 77 3 15 4 2 Error reporting using the SRQ mechanism Program an error reporting routine and use the Service Request SRQ Generation mechanism to interrupt the execution of the program to e
86. of the instrument The response to the IDN query consists of the fields above in Arbitrary ASCII Response Data format This implies that the IDN query must be the last query in a program message unit because the arbitrary ASCII response data is terminated with the New Line character 10 decimal The lt sw_id gt parameter identifies the type version and date of the instrument firmware The lt mask_id gt parameter identifies the version of the Universal Host Mask processor software The lt UFO_id gt parameter identifies the version of the Universal Front processor software Example Send IDN Read FLUKE PM3384B 0 SW3394BIM V4 0 1996 10 02 UHM V1 0 UFO V2 0 Front panel compliance The IDN query is the remote equivalent of the Maintenance option of the UTILITY menu 4 20 COMMAND REFERENCE OPC Operation Complete Syntax OPC Query form OPC Response 1 Description The command causes the instrument to set the operation complete bit OPC in the standard Event Status Register ESR when all pending operations have been finished When the OPC command is received the OPC bit is set in the ESR register when all pending operations have been completed The OPC bit is cleared along with the other bits in the ESR register when the ESR query is executed PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC 7161541312 1 0 ESR The OPC query places the ASCII character 1 i
87. samples of 16 bits Trigger Level MAX Acquire Averaging OFF Peak detection OFF Envelope OFF Autoranging attenuators OFF Acquisition Locked Pre trigger view 50 of MTB 5 ms Bandwidth limiter OFF Measure 1 amp 2 OFF Math 162 OFF Cursors OFF Trace intensity 0 18 User text Data cleared Display OFF Beeper ON Hardcopy PRINT amp PLOT Plotter HPGL Pass Fail testing OFF Cancels or aborts any instrument dependent action Cancels the effect of the OPC command and the OPC query Sets the TRIGger subsystem into its IDLE state The RST command does not affect the following State of the IEEE 488 1 interface GPIB IEEE 488 1 address of the instrument Contents of the Output Queue Contents of the Error Event Queue Service Request Enable setting in the SRE register Transition filters in the status subsystem Event registers in the status subsystem Event enable registers in the status subsystem Calibration data that affects the device specifications Version number set by the SYSTem VERSion command Contents of the internal memory registers SAV RCL Example Send RST Front panel compliance All settings not mentioned in the description are set according to the front panel fixed setup which can be recalled by pressing the keys STATUS and TEXT OFF at the same time COMMAND REFERENCE 4 25 SAV Save instrument setup Syntax SAV lt numeric_data gt Description The SAV command sa
88. source MATH1 2 CHn Mi scale offset filter window width differentiate window width FFT area left right border Y offset integrate limited area FFT absolute relative readout Display settings length 27 bytes settings display on off ground and trigger level indication on off dots join on off X versus Y on off status view on off window on off menu number menu on off hold off time trace separation X source X versus Y mode display trace definition 1 to 8 sine wave interpolation on off Trace intensity settings length 5 bytes analog trace intensity mtb dtb intensity ratio Display trace position settings length 34 bytes display y pos trace 1 to 8 display x pos trace 1 to 8 Setup label text 22 characters length 24 bytes setup label text characters Autorange settings length 8 bytes auto time base on off auto attenuation CH1 2 3 4 on off degrees mode on off 4 stroke normal mode auto time base degrees time factors Real time clock settings length 3 bytes clock format selection Service factory settings length 5 bytes auto manual cal adjustments INDEX 1 1 Numerics 16 Dit Samples om Poet tte et ER tede e RR 3 33 CORTE P LAREDO EA E E GAAN RR ORIS 4 97 Vli REED T 4 97 8 he Mee NER EROR es 3 32 Absol te EET ios dive nbus
89. the file is requested The layout of the file on disk is described in section A 5 1 Application summary e Request the file name from which to restore the instrument setup and open the file for input e Call routine Enter Setup to restore the instrument settings Call routine Enter Envreg to restore the reference envelope e Routine Enter Setup does the following Reads the length of the settings data from the opened file Reads the settings data byte after byte from the opened file setupout Restores the instrument settings by sending SYSTem SET lt setupout gt e Routine Save Envreg does the following Reads the envelope register from the opened file envreg Reads the length of the envelope data from the opened file Reads the envelope data byte after byte from the opened file envelope Restores the reference envelope by sending TRACe M lt envreg gt lt envelope gt e Close the opened file Application program Note Q uick BASIC program is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPA52 BAS The program code that runs under TestTeam Plus and LabWindows is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPB52 BAS 12 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES A 5 3 Running a pass fail test In the following example the current pass fail test setup is started and monitored During monitoring use is made of the pass fail status bit bit 10 in the OPERation status register to detect a failing waveform The OPERation bit
90. via the status reporting system which is completely described in chapter 5 THE STATUS REPORTING SYSTEM of the SCPI Users Handbook The following figure shows the principle of the standard Status Byte STB register and the Service Request Generation SRQ mechanism OPERation Status Error Event Queue Output Queue Not Used 5 read by Serial Poll Service Request Generation SRQ Status Byte Reg Logical OR Service Request Enable Register PX SRE lt NRf gt SRE ST7164 Figure 3 23 status reporting model for CombiScope instruments 3 15 1 Status data for the CombiScope instruments The following status data applies to the CombiScope instruments e Forthe meaning of the bits of the OPERation status refer to section 3 15 1 1 e Forthe meaning of the bits of the QUEStionable status refer to section 3 15 1 2 e Forthe meaning of the bits of the standard Event Status Register refer to the command reference for the ESR query e message output queue can contain about 250 data bytes e error event queue can contain 20 error messages before it overflows USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 71 3 15 1 1 Operation status data CONDition filter EVENt ENABle CALibrating 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 RANGing 2 2 2 SWEeping 3 3 3 0 4 4 4 wait for TRIGger 5 5 5 0 6
91. voltage Peak 2 Hertz meter Megabyte milliseconds milliwatt 1E 3 seconds percentage Default program message part which can be optionally specified This means that a program message may or may not contain the defaulted keyword without changing the semantic meaning of the message Program message part that can be repeated zero or more times sign to indicate a choice or Ctrl key E g END means Ctrl END logical OR symbol logical AND symbol C 3 List of Tables Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Section 4 2 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Appendix B 3 Appendix E TRIGger modes section 3 4 1 3 Relation between acquisition length and available trace memory section 3 10 The Operation Status bits section 3 15 1 1 The Questionable Status bits section 3 15 1 2 Command summary Display character set for CombiScope instruments DISPlay WINDow2 MTB values in the digital mode SENSe SWEep TIME Reference numbers for front panel keys SYSTem KEY Cross reference functions commands Summary of instrument settings per node MANUAL CONVENTIONS C 5 C 4 List of Figures Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Figure 3 21 Figure
92. 0 memory registers are available M1 to M50 Figure 3 20 Trace memory control Note CH4 cannot be selected as the source for the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments Instead the external channel can be selected e g M1 E USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 57 The following table shows the relation between the trace acquisition length TRACe POINts and the available channel CHx and memory traces Mx TRACe POINts CHANNELS MEMORY REGISTERS STANDARD PM33x0B 512 4 2 EXT M1 M8 2K 4 2 M1 2 4K 2 2 M1 M2 8K 1 1 M1 2 EXTENDED PM33x0B 512 4 2 EXT M1 M50 8k 4 2 EXT M1 2 16 2 2 M1 2 32K 1 1 M1 2 Standard memory acquisition length allows for example CH1 1 1 2 1 CH3 1 M2 Extended memory 32K acquisition length allows for example CH2 M 2 2 2 Table 3 2 Relation between acquisition length and available trace memory Note Delayed Time Base DTB acquisition traces are only saved in the CH1 to CH4 memory when the acquisition length is 512 samples DTB acquisitions can only be defined via front panel operations 3 10 1 Trace formatting The FORMat command allows you to format the resolution of trace sample values The resolution is determined by specifying the number of bits used to code the sample values of all trace acquisitions Trace samples can be programmed to be formatted as 16
93. 01 toggles on off MAGNIFY keys SYSTem KEY 210 211 selects previous next step ENVELOPE DISPlay MENU ACQuire SYSTem KEY toggles on off MULTiple shot DISPlay MENU TBMode SYSTem KEY 1 up or 2 down after INITiate CONTinuous OFF COMMAND REFERENCE 4 1 4 COMMAND REFERENCE In the first section the notation conventions concerning the specification of the syntax and data types are given In the second section a summary of all commands and associate parameters is given in alphabetical order This gives you a quick reference of the SCPI com mandas In the third section detailed descriptions of all commands and queries for the CombiScopes instruments instruments are given The IEEE 2 commands queries beginning with a are listed first followed by the SCPI commands and queries in alphabetical order 4 1 Notation Conventions 4 1 1 Syntax specification notations The method that is used in this manual to specify the syntax of the commands is based on the EBNF notations To be able to correctly spell the commands you need to be familiar with the concept of this notation The notation form uses 3 types of symbols that need to be distinguished Meta symbols Meta symbols have a particular meaning They don t specify any literal or message element but serve a particular purpose Example is the symbol for alternative 0 1 means either 0 or 1 Non terminal symbols Non terminal symbols are message elements that a
94. 1 2 as well as both channel traces e g CH1 CH2 are displayed In the digital mode the summarized trace e g CH3 CH4 or the channel trace s e g CH3 CH4 is displayed Switching CH1 CH2 on switches CH1 and 2 off Switching CH1 CH2 off switches CH1 and CH2 on After a RST command channel 1 is switched on and the other channels are switched off Also the addition of input channels is switched off Limitations For the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments Channel 3 is not applicable and channel 4 is the external trigger view channel Channel 4 be switched on only if it is already selected as trigger input TRIGger SOURce EXTernal Channel 4 be switched on only if channel 1 or 2 is on Example Send RST Switches channel 1 on and the others off Send gt SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIMe VOLTage2 Switches channel 2 on The result is that the input channels 1 and 2 are switched on Send SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIMe VOLTage SUM 1 2 Switches CH1 CH2 on The result is that the addition of input channels 1 and 2 is switched on Front panel compliance The SENSe FUNCtion command is the remote equivalent of the front panel ON CH1 CH2 and CH3 CH4 keys 4 80 COMMAND REFERENCE SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME Syntax SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum lt NRf gt The trigger delay time in seconds A negative value causes a pre trigger view time whereas a posit
95. 1 The first argument in the expression that defines the mathematical operation to be performed is a trace that may be specified either implicitly or explicitly by its trace name A trace is specified implicitly when the keyword IMPLied is used as argument in the expression When IMPlied is specified the trace that is programmed with the CAL Culate FEED command is used as the first argument in the expression The trace that determines the second argument must always be specified explicitly by its trace name PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate FEED CH3 1 Channel 3 input source CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate MATH IMPLied CH2 1 Channel3 channel 2 CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate MATH STATe ON 1 Math function enabled resulting trace CH3 2 is stored in M1 1 3 9 8 Differentiating and integrating traces The INTegral function performs a point to point integration on a trace The result of the integration process is a trace Each point in the trace is the integral up to the corresponding point in the original input trace The DERivative DIFFerential function calculates the differential quotient of the trace points Each point in the resulting trace is the derivative of the corresponding point in the original input trace The width of the differential window can be programmed from 3 to 129 points in increments of 2 points by the CALCulate DERivative POINts command After a RST command the number of points
96. 2 1 Requests for 2 1 trace Read lt trace buffer Reads 2 1 trace Note result of a CALCulate block can be used as source for the other CALCulate block but not as source for the same CALCulate block PROGRAM EXAMPLE DIM response AS STRING 1033 Dimensions trace buffer CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate2 FEED CH3 1 Channel3 source CALC2 CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate2 TRANsform FREQuency WINDow HAMMing 1 CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate2 TRANsform FREQuency STATe ON 1 Enables FFT Hamming CALL Send 0 8 TRACe M2 1 1 Requests for M2 1 trace CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the M2 1 trace 3 48 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 9 2 Mathematical calculations Mathematical calculations can be performed on 2 traces using the CALCulate1 MATH CALCulate2 MATH functions These functions comply with the front panel features MATH1 and MATH respectively The calculation can be an addition a subtraction or a multiplication The attenuation of the resulting trace is automatically set higher than the sum of the attenuations of the individual traces PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate MATH CH1 CH2 1 Channel 1 4 channel 2 CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate MATH STATe ON 1 Math function enabled resulting trace CH1 CH2 is stored in M1 1 CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate2 MATH 1 1 CH2 1 1 1 channel2 resulting trace which is the CH1 trace is stored in M2
97. 402 DISPlay MENU TRIGger TRIGgerLEVEL AUTO DISPlay MENU DMODe SYSTem KEY n TRIGGER MAIN TB key EXT TRIG key TRIGGER menu TRIGGER softkeysn 1 6 pos neg trigger edge MAIN TB trigger source SYSTem KEY 604 SYSTem KEY 607 SYSTem KEY 610 SYSTem KEY 613 SYSTem KEY 613 PM33x0B SYSTem KEY 209 DISPlay MENU TRIGger SYSTem KEY n TRIGger SLOPe TRIGger SOURCe CROSS REFERENCES B 27 FUNCTION KEYS MENUS RELATED SCPI COMMAND S TV TRIGGER TRIGgerTYPE VIDEO key TRIGGER SYSTem KEY 209 menu TRIGGER DISPlay MENU TRIGger field1 field2 lines TRIGger VIDeo F IELd NUMBer TRIGger VIDeo FIELd SE Lect selectline number TRACK TRIGger VIDeo LINE pos neg signal polarity TRIGger VIDeo S SIGnal VIDEO SYSTEM TRIGger VIDeo FORMat TYPE TRIGger VIDeo F ORMat TYP E JLPFRame USERTEXT DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT CLEar DIS Play WINDow2 TEXT DATA DIS Play WINDow2 TEXT STATe key UTILITY SYSTem KEY 104 menu UTILITY USER TEXT DISPlay MENU UTIL softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY n UTIL MAINTENANCE CALibration ALL key CAL xCAL UTIL MENU key UTILITY SYSTem KEY 104 menu UTILITY DISPlay MENU UTIL softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY n UTIL SCREEN amp SOUND SYSTem BEE Per SYSTem BEEPe rSTATe key UTILITY SYSTem KEY 104 menu UTILITY SCREEN amp SOUND DISPlay MENU UTIL softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY n 28 CROSS REFERENCES FUNCTION KEYS MENUS VOLT MEASUREMENT
98. 6 6 0 7 7 7 Digital mode 8 8 Pass Fail valid 9 9 9 Pass Fail status 10 10 10 0 11 oe 11 11 0 12 12 12 0 13 13 13 0 14 14 14 0 15 us 15 15 T STATus OPERation CONDition PTRansition NTRansition EVENt ENABle Figure 3 24 Operation Status structure BIT MEANING 0 CaALibrating This bit is set during the time that the instrument is performing a calibration 2 RANGing This bit is set during the time that the instrument is autoranging autosetting 3 SWEeping 10 This bit is set when the sweep a data acquisition is in progress This bit is reset to zero when the data acquisition is finished At the same time the OPC bit 0 in the standard Event Status Register ESR is set Only valid for multiple shot mode INITiate CONTinuous OFF Waiting for TRIGger This bit is set when the trigger system is initiated INITiate and waiting for a trigger to start an acquisition This bit is reset to zero as soon as the instrument is triggered and the acquisition started Only valid for single shot and multiple shot mode INITiate CONTinuous OFF Digital mode This bit is set when the CombiScope instrument is in the digital mode Pass Fail valid This bit is set when the pass fail status at bit 10 is valid Pass Fail status This bit is set if the pass fail test has failed If bit 9 1 and bit 10 0 the test has passed If bit 9 1 and bit 10
99. 68 COMMAND REFERENCE 4 11 COMMAND PARAMETERS NOTES TRIGger SEQuence 1 STARt FILTer HPASS FREQuency 3E4 30 KHz HF reject STATe Boolean LPAS s FREQuency 0 10 3 4 0 DC coupling 10 coupling 30000 LF reject STATe Boolean HOLDoff NRf MAXimum LEVel NRf MAXimum MINimum AUTO Boolean SLOPe POSitive NEGative EITHer SOURce IMMediate INTernal lt n gt LINE BUS EXTernal n 1 2 3 4 EDGE VIDeo LOGic GLITch VIDeo FIELd NUMBer 1 2 1 2 field1 field2 SELect ALL NUMBer ALL lines triggering NUMBer field triggering FORMat TYPE PAL SECAM NTSC HDTV video standard LPFRame 525 625 1050 1125 1250 number of lines per frame LINE NRf MINimum MAXimum from 1 to 1250 SSIGnal POSitive NEGative signal polarity 4 12 COMMAND REFERENCE Note 1 voltage parameters Note 2 measure function AC AMPLitude DC FALL OVERshoot PREShoot TIME FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MINimum NDUTycycle NWIDth P DUTycycle PERiod PTP eak PWIDth TMAXimum TMINimum RISE OVERshoot PREShoot TIME expected voltage resolution measure parameters reference low reference high expected time time gt expected frequency frequency resolution lt reference_middle gt lt refere
100. 82 Initiates fetches AC RMS value Read lt second measured AC RMS value Example 2 Send CONFigure VOLTage RISE TIME 0 5 20 80 1E 2 2 Configures the rise time expected voltage 0 5V LOW ref 20 HIGH ref 80 expected time 0 01 seconds channel 2 Send gt INPut2 COUPling DC Channel 2 becomes DC coupled Send READ RISE TIME 2 Initiates fetches the rise time of the signal on channel 2 Read lt the measured rise time Send FETCh FALL TIME 82 Fetches the fall time of the signal on channel 2 Read lt the measured fall time COMMAND REFERENCE 4 45 DISPlay BRIGhtness Syntax DISPlay BRIGhtness lt Numeric_data gt MINimum MAXimum Numeric data 0 0 1 0 Equals 0 0 Trace display is fully blanked MAXimum Equals 1 0 Trace display has full intensity Query form DISPlay BRIGhtness MINimum MAXimum Response NR3 lt NR3 gt 0 00E00 1 00E00 Description The command sets and the query returns the brightness of the trace display The number 0 0 MINimum gives the lowest brightness The number 1 0 MAXimum gives the highest brightness Notice that the intensity of text display is not controlled with this command After a RST command the brightness is set at 1 80E 01 i e 0 18 Example Send DISPlay BRIGhtness 0 5 Sets trace brightness at 0 5 Front panel compliance The DISPlay BRIGhtnes
101. ALC1 on 3 56 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 10 Trace Memory The trace memory of the CombiScopes instruments consists of space for channel acquisition traces CH1 to CH4 and memory register traces M1 to M8 and M9 to M50 extended The amount of acquisition and register space depends on the following e Whether the CombiScope instrument is equipped with standard or with extended memory e specified acquisition length number of trace samples with the TRACe POINts command Example Send TRACe POINts CH1 8192 This command specifies an acquisition length of 8192 samples for all traces Notes Only the following trace acquisition lengths can be programmed 512 2024 2K 4096 4K 8192 8K 16384 16K or 32768 32K If a different acquisition length is programmed the contents of all acquisition and register space is cleared So all previously stored traces are lost After a RST command the number of trace samples is 512 The resulting traces of the post processing functions are always stored in memory register 1 for CALCulate1 functions and in memory register 2 for CALCulate2 functions TRACe CH 1 M1 1 M2 1 M31 M50 1 CH2 M12 M22 M32 M50_2 SENSe CH3 Mi 3 M23 M33 M50 3 CH4 M14 M24 M4 f e M50_4 ST7163 Note For standard memory 8 memory registers are available M1 to M6 For extended memory 5
102. ALOG onoff 1 03 X pos neg 1 VIDEO 3 SYSTEM hf rej hdtv DIGITAL MODE TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER MAIN TB MAIN TB edgetv edgetv TRIG TYPE eoi 8 M 1 field1 1 TRIG SOUR NIS 003 ielaz i lines 2 TRACK T level p LINE NBR _ TRIGLEVAUTO gt oi sq noise on off 1 5 AME 1 TRIG SLOP NEG F X pos neg EITH 4 VIDEO 1 a itrej SYSTEM hf rej hdtv TRIG FILTLPAS FREQ STAT Lg Ttupas FREQ TRIG FILTHPAS NUMB 1 TRIG VID FIEL ge TRIG VID LINE gt TRIG VID SSIG gt Notes ch3is not applicable for PM33x0B TRIGGER MAIN TB edge tv field 1 field 2 lines TRACK isi Q pos neg VIDEO SYSTEM extinstead of ch4 for GLITch can be programmed as trigger type TRIGger TYPE instead of LOGic for PM33x0B hdtv TRIGGER MAIN TB edge tv logic state pattern glitch LHTH CLOCK 4 chi ch2 ch3 ch4 ST7437 CROSS REFERENCES B 13 VIDEO SYSTEM hdtv ntsc d pal secam Y TRIG VID FORM TYPE LINES 1050 1125 1250 v TRIG VID FORM LPFR ENTER 4 TRIGGER MAIN TB TRIGGER MAIN TB TRIGGER MAIN TB edge tv glitch d TRACK FO ST7438 14 CROSS REFERENCES
103. AM NTSC HDTV lt NRf gt 525 625 1050 1125 1250 525 Selects 525 lines per frame NTSC 625 Selects 625 lines per frame PAL or SECAM PAL is default if previous selection was not SECAM 1050 Selects 1050 lines per frame HDTV 1125 Selects 1125 lines per frame HDTV 1250 MAXimum Selects 1250 lines per frame HDTV PAL Selects PAL standard 625 lines frame SCAM SECAM Selects SECAM standard 625 lines frame NTSC Selects NTSC standard 525 lines frame HDTV Selects HDTV standard 1050 1125 1250 lines frame Query form TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo FORMai TYPE LPFRame MINimum MAXimum Alias TRIGger STARt VIDeo FORMat T YPE LPFRame MINimum MAXimum 4 130 COMMAND REFERENCE Response 525 625 1050 1125 1250 525 NTSC standard selected 525 lines frame 625 PAL default or SECAM standard selected 625 lines frame 1050 HDTV standard selected 1050 lines frame 1125 HDTV standard selected 1125 lines frame 1250 standard selected 1250 lines frame The minimum and maximum number of lines per frame depends on the TV standard specified If for example HDTV was selected returns 1050 and MAXimum returns 1250 Query form TRIGger SEQuencer 1 VIDeo FORMat TYPE Alias TRIGger STARt VIDeo FORMat TYPE Response PAL SCAM NTSC HDTV PAL PAL standard 625 lines frame selected SCAM SECAM standard 625 lines frame selecte
104. AR DISPLAY DISPLAY 221 em x xxD oO o m4 O X pos om5 3 trace 4 register 7 register RETURN 4 B 2 8 SETUPS menu Programmable with the SAV RCL SYST SET commands ST7087 CROSS REFERENCES B 11 B 2 9 MODE menu SYST SET RCL SAV ANALOG MODE EVENT EVENT i DELAY DELAY ON on off e on off trig E 2 TRACK d OFF single 4 1022 i CHANNEL 1 i 1 1234 a ANALOG 1 LEVELS Wi 1 99 8mV 1 bigiz f Xj i alt chop RETURN 4 RETURN 4 Ld es i Temo DEED pero ACQ Ete LENGTH CONFIRM ON 4ch 1 INIT CONT auto 4 single J 5 multi 1 2 HH ROLL ROLL 2ch amp on off on off 4k pts y REALTIME STOP ON J ENS SWE REAL ON ich OFF 7 ps To luc 8k pts ARE YOU EVENT SURE DELAY 1 Kerm LENGTH BETURNX Do aid POIN a 12 CROSS REFERENCES B 2 10 TRIGGE R menu ANALOG MODE TRIGGER TRIGGER TRIGGER MAIN TB MAIN TB TRIG TYPE edgetv A4 edgetv gt A field 1 INT3 1 ch3 i TRIG SOUR field 2 LINE i line 1 lines 4 level p TRIG LEV AUTO Sh of AN
105. ATE FREQuency STATe Boolean n 1112 Numeric data 3 5 7 39 41 Query form CALCulate lt n gt FILTer GATE FREQuency POINts MINimum MAXimum Response 5 41 If MINimum was specified 3 is returned If MAXimum was specified 41 is returned Query form CALCulate lt n gt FILTer GATE FREQuency STATe Response 0 1 0 Filter function turned off 1 Filter function turned on Description CALC lt n gt FILT FREQ POIN command specifies the width of the filter window which can be an odd number of points varying from 3 points to 41 points in incre ments of 2 points The filter window can be turned on with the CALCulate FIL Ter GATE FREQuency STATe command CALC lt n gt FILT FREQ STAT command switches the calculate function FILTer on or off The result of the filter function is stored in M1 n for CALCulate1 and in M2 n for CALCulate2 dependent on the input source CHn or Mi n n 1 2 3 4 After a RST command the filter window width is 19 points and the filter function is turned off Example Send gt CALCulate FILTer FREQuency POINts 21 The width becomes 21 points Send CALCulate FILTer FREQuency STATe ON Switches the FILTer function on Front panel compliance The CALCulate1 and CALCulate2 commands use the MATH1 and MATH2 features of the CombiScope instrument COMMAND REFERENCE 4 35 CALCulate lt n gt INTegral STATe Syntax CALCulate
106. After the acquisition the result is sent to the controller The instrument itself selects an optimal setting for this purpose and carries out the requested measurement as well as possible Moreover it automatically starts the measurement USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 9 3 3 2 Benefits of using parameters The generic form of a measurement instruction is as follows MEASure VOLTage measure function lt voltage_parameters gt lt measure_parameters gt lt channel_list gt The VOLTage keyword is a default node which specifies the signal characteristic to be measured relates to the voltage component of the signal The lt measure_function gt specifies the desired signal characteristic The parameters can be used to provide additional information to the instrument about the expected signal and the desired result The oscilloscope uses this information to determine the best settings for the requested task As the syntax shows the parameters can be left out defaulted In that case the oscilloscope chooses it own settings based upon the actual available input signal and its own trade offs The result of defaulting parameters is that the measurement needs more time to complete The VOLTage parameters relate to the VOLTage node in the header These parameters specify the expected voltage and the desired resolution lt voltage_parameters gt lt expected_voltage gt lt resolution gt The expected voltage in
107. Autoranging ombiScope Instrument PM3370B PM3380B PM3390B PM3384B PM3394B SCPI Users Manual 02 Nov 1998 ACE AUTOSET CAL SETUPS UTILITY ANALOG ACQUIRE SAVE RECALL MEASURE MATH DISPLAY HARD COPY OOO OOO Co UR STATUS track CURSORS HOLD OFF TRIGGER MAGNIFY 4XPOSP 0 282 0 INTENSITY LOCAL RUNISTOP RANGE SINGLE TRIGGER TRIGGER DELAYED TIME BASE DELAY POISITION i LEVEL sTIME DIV ns TB MODE w VAn Y TRACE LJ ROTATION VERT MENU ALT CHOP Pos Pos TRIG TRIG2 TRiGa TRIGA 0 AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AMPL RANGECHIACHe AMPL RANGE INV AMPL RANGECHS CH AMPL RANGE INV LJ m GRATICULE 4 4 Pal ILLUMINATION ADC ADC z ADC 77 on 5 on GND S GND 5 d m E m v v v POWER Probe Adjust 5 9 Anm 1 25pF 25pF 21 ST7721A FLUKE TRADEMARKS Microsoft and Microsoft QuickBASIC are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation CombiScope is a trademark of Fluke Corporation PCIIA is a trademark of National Instruments Corporation HPGL is a trademark of Hewlett Packard
108. BEEP command causes a beep of about 1 second to be generated by the instrument even if the SYSTem BEEPer STATe is OFF SYST BEEP STAT command enables or disables the beeper of the instrument If the STATe is turned OFF no instrument condition will cause an audible beep to be emitted After a RST command the beeper is turned on Example Send SYSTem ERRor Reads the error queue Read lt error number error description IF error number 0 THEN send gt SYSTem BEEPer Beeps on error END IF Send gt SYSTem BEEPer STATe OFF Turns automatic beeper off Send SYSTem BEEPer Generates a beep Front panel compliance The SYSTem BEEPer STATe command is the remote equivalent of the front panel BEEP ON OFF option of the UTILITY menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 97 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol DTR SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol RTS Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTroI DTR ON STANdard SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol RTS ON STANdard ON Selects the 3 wire option The DTR or RTS line is always asserted STANdard Selects the 7 wire option Query form SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol DTR SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol RTS Response ON STAN ON 3 wire DTR RTS control STAN 7 wire DTR RTS control Description Controls the DTR Data Terminal Ready or RTS Request To Send line of the EIA 232 D RS 232 C interface This command has the same effect as se
109. Company Copyright 1996 1998 Fluke Corporation All rights reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced by any means or in any form without written permission of the copyright owner Printed in the Netherlands CONTENTS Page 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL 1 1 1 1 Whatthis Manual Contains 1 1 2 GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING 2 1 2 1 Preparations for SCPI Programming 2 1 2 1 1 System setup 2 1 2 1 2 Programming 2 1 2 2 Initializing the CombiScope Instrument 2 4 2 2 1 How to reset the CombiScope instrument 2 4 2 2 2 How to identify the CombiScope instrument 2 4 2 2 3 How to switch between digital and analog mode 2 4 23 Error 2 5 2 4 Acquiring Traces 2 6 2 4 4 How to acquire a single shot trace 2 7 2 4 2 How to acquire repetitive traces 2 8 2 5 Measuring Signal Characteristics 2 9 2 5 1 How to make a single shot measurement 2 10 2 5 2 How to make repeated measurements 2 10 3 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 1 3 1 ER heri ades 3 1 3 2 Fundamental Programming Concep
110. Description The RST command resets the instrument The hardware and software of the instrument is initialized without affecting any of the IEEE interface conditions The instrument turns into a fixed setup which is optimized for remote operation This fixed setup is different from the setup that can be recalled via the front panel softkeys and the SETUPS menu which is optimized for local control The RST command affects the following e Sets the following instrument settings independent of the past history FUNCTION DEFAULT SETTING 5 Digital mode ON X deflection X vs Y OFF Delayed Time Base OFF Main Time Base Sweep time 10 ms total acquisition Autoranging OFF X magnify factor 1 Channel 1 ON 200 mV div DC coupled Position centred Impedance 1 without probe Channels 2 3 and 4 OFF Polarity NORMal INV OFF add142 CH14CH2 OFF add344 CH34CH4 OFF Trigger Type EDGE Source IMMediate Slope POS itive Level pp OFF Noise ON Level MAXimum 1 64 V DC signal coupling Video mode ALL lines Video signal polarity POSitive 625 video lines per frame Video line field 1 1 Hold off time 0 Low pass filter ON Low pass cutoff frequency 0 Hz DC coupling High pass filter OFF High pass cutoff frequency bandwidth 100 200 MHz TB mode Single shot Roll mode OFF 4 24 COMMAND REFERENCE FUNCTION DEFAULT SETTING S TB mode Realtime only OFF Event delay OFF Acquisition length 512
111. ENTS 3 63 Send gt RST Switches MEAS1 amp 2 off Send gt DISPlay MENU MEASure Switches MEASURE menu on Send gt SYSTem KEY 2 KEY 4 Switches MEAS1 and MEAS2 on Send gt DISPlay WINDow TEXT1 DATA Requests MEAS1 data Read lt pkpk 6000E 04 V Response peak to peak 0 6 volt CURSORS DATA The CURSORS function offers a wide variety of voltage and time readouts The following readout selections can be made via the CURSORS READOUT softkey menu lt n gt TYPE UNIT DESCRIPTION 10 V Voltage difference delta V between the cursors dY U Vertical voltage X deflection on 11 V1 V Absolute voltage of cursor 1 to ground 12 V2 V Absolute voltage of cursor 2 to ground 13 Vdc V DC voltage 20 dT S Time difference delta T between the cursors 21 F Hz Frequency 1 dT in Hertz 30 dX U Horizontal voltage X deflection on 40 phase The phase between two channels in degrees Celsius stands for degrees sign 51 T1 trg s The time between cursor 1 and the trigger event 52 T2 tg s The time between cursor 2 and the trigger event MATH FFT DATA The 1 2 FFT functions offer the readout of the relative or absolute frequency and amplitude The following readout selections can be made via the CURSORS READOUT and MATH FFT PARAM softkey menus n TYPE UNIT DESCRIPTION 60 FFT freq Hz FFT frequency in Hertz 61 FFT ampl variable FFT amplitude in Relative
112. ES in this chapter are supplied on floppy e The following error handling routine is used 7 Ckckckckckckck ck ck ck ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck Ck CK C CK CK CK CK CK CK CC CK CK COCOS 0C S S S S A M amp M amp M amp M amp Subroutine reading all errors from the error queue kkkkkkkxkxkxkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkxkxkxkkkkkkkkxkkkkkxk SUB errorcheck er SPACE 1 WHILE LEFT er 1 lt gt 0 CMD SYSTem ERRor CALL Send 0 8 CMD 1 Sends error query er SPACES 60 CALL Receive 0 8 er 256 Reads error string PRINT error er Displays error string WEND END SUB e Error reporting is invoked as follows CALL errorcheck e n the command strings the short form commands are specified in capitals The additional characters in lower case complete the long form commands 2 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES A 1 Measuring Signal Characteristics Measuring signal characteristics can be done in either of the following ways 1 Using the measurement instructions Example A 1 1 shows how to do that automatically by letting the CombiScope instrument select the best possible settings Example A 1 2 shows how to do that after programming your own instrument settings 2 Using the DISPlay WINDow TEXT lt n gt DATA query to read signal values as measured by the MEAS1 amp MEAS2 features of the CombiScope instrument refer to example A 1 3 A 1 1 Making automatic measurements In the following examp
113. ET GL GTL GP GPIB GR HDTV Hex HPGL Analog to Digital Convertor Acceptor Handshake American National Standards Institute American Standard Code for Information Interchange Controller Calibration Clear Status Command Error Carriage Return data byte Device Clear Device Dependent Error decimal Digital Storage Oscilloscope Device Trigger Extended Backus Nauer Format exempli gratia for example End Or Identify End Of Line Event Status Bit Escape Event Status Enable Event Status Register External First In First Out Group Execute Trigger Go to Local Go To Local General Purpose General Purpose Interface Bus Go to Remote High Definition Television Hexadecimal Hewlett Packard Graphics Language MANUAL CONVENTIONS IDY IDN IEC IEEE IFC INT I O ISO L LF LLO LO MAX MAV MIN MLA MSS MTA MTB NL NRf NTF NTR NTSC OPC OPER OPT OSC PAL phs pmt pmu PON PTF PTR QUES Identify Identification International Electrotechnical Commission Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers id est that is Interface Clear Internal Input Output International Standards Organization Listener Line Feed Local Lockout Listen Only Maximum Message Available Minimum My Listen Address Master Summary Status My Talk Address Main Time Base New Line equal
114. Example CONFigure RISE TIME Configures the oscilloscope to perform a default rise time measurement 1096 to 9096 increase of the signal amplitude READ RISE TIME 20 80 Requests for the rise time of the 20 to 80 increase of the signal amplitude As the CombiScope instrument is able to respond to this request the desired rise time is calculated and returned 3 3 5 Multiple measurements Sometimes it is necessary to perform multiple measurements of the same signal characteristic This can be realized by executing multiple MEASure queries However this implies that the relative time consuming configuration portion of MEASure is unnecessarily repeated This can be easily avoided by using the CONFigure and READ concept as described in the preceding chapter This concept allows you to do the configuration only once by sending the CONFigure command one time Sending multiple READ queries next causes the instrument to repeatedly execute the desired measurement Example CONFigure FREQuency Configures the instrument to perform a frequency measurement USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 15 READ FREQuency Starts the acquisition and returns the measured frequency READ FREQuency Starts a next acquisition and returns the new frequency result READ FREQuency Etc 3 3 6 Multiple characteristics from a single acquisition It is often necessary to determine several signal characteristics from the last acquired waveform Starti
115. FFT selected dB Absolute FFT selected dBm V Vrms 3 64 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS PROGRAM EXAMPLE Read and print the DC and frequency characteristic of the actual signal using the MEAS1 and MEAS functions The program stops to let you make the requested MEAS selections DIM response AS STRING 30 CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay MENU MEASure 1 Displays MEASURE menu xx xx Enable 51 amp MEAS2 and select MEAS1 DC and MEAS2 frequency PRINT gt gt gt Press the LOCAL key set 51 function on and select MEAS1 volt dc PRINT gt gt gt Set MEAS2 function on and select MEAS2 time freq PRINT gt gt gt Press any key on the controller keyboard when finished WHILE INKEYS WEND CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay WINDow TEXT1 DATA 1 Queries for voltdc CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads volt dc value PRINT Measured volt dc LEFT response IBCNT 1 CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay WINDow TEXT2 DATA 1 Queries for time freq CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads time freq value PRINT Measured time freq LEFTS response IBCNT 1 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 65 3 11 2 2 Display of user defined text The DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT commands allow you to define and clear the user text on the screen area of your CombiScope instrument After a RST command the display of the previously defined user text is turned off PROGRAM EXAMPLE 1 text a
116. GE RECALL 1 INV MEASURE 1 AMPL mv A MATH 1 AUTO RANGE only for PM33x4B DISPLAY 1 CH3 CH4 HARD COPY 113 AMPL mv A AUTO RANGE AMPL for PM33x0B STATUS LOCAL 201 CURSORS 204 INV only for PM 33x48 TRIGGER 209 MAGNIFY 4 210 TEXT OFF MAGNIFY 211 AMPLv w ON RUN STOP 309 AC DC GND AUTO RANGE 310 AMPLv w SINGLE ARMED 311 ON AC DC GND DTB 402 AMPLv DTBTIME DIVs 403 ON only for PM33x4B DTB TIME DIV ns gt 404 AC DC GND TB MODE 409 AMPLv w TIME DIV VAR s lt 410 ON TRIG VIEW for PM33x0B TIME DIV VAR ns pm 411 AC DC GND AC DC for PM33x0B Table 4 8 Reference number for front panel keys Notes Simulation of pressing the CAL key 102 is not useful because calibration is only done when pressed for 2 seconds e Simulation of pressing the HARD COPY key 113 is only useful when the RS 232 C interface is selected as output connection e Channel 3 CH3 not applicable for PM33x0B 4 104 COMMAND REFERENCE Example 1 Send SYSTem KEY 101 Simulates the pressing of AUTOSET Send SYSTem KEY Read lt 101 Returns the last key simulation Example 2 Send RST Resets the instrument Send DISPlay MENU UTIL Enables UTILITY softkey menu Send gt SYSTem KEY 2 KEY 5 KEY 4 Selects the options PROBE PROBE CORR 10 1 Send DISPlay MENU STATe OFF Disables UTILITY softkey menu In this example the probe correcti
117. GPIB interface CALL IBTMO 0 13 Timeout at 10 seconds Reset the instrument and clear the status data cmd RST CLS CALL Send 0 8 cmd EndEOI CALL errorcheck Configure for measuring the frequency of the Probe signal cmd CONFigure VOLTage FREQuency 0 6 2000 1 CALL Send 0 8 cmd EndEOI PRINT Frequency Amplitude Period Pos width Neg width PRINT Hertz Volts seconds seconds seconds PRINT Read the signal characteristics 10 times FOR 1 TO 10 cmd READ FREQuency CALL Send 0 8 cmd EndEOI CALL Receive 0 8 res StopEOI Enters frequency PRINT LEFT res INSTR res CHR 10 1 cmd FETCh AMPLitude CALL Send 0 8 cmd 01 CALL Receive 0 8 res StopEOI Enters amplitude PRINT LEFT res INSTR res CHR 10 1 cmd FETCh PERiod CALL Send 0 8 cmd EndEOI CALL Receive 0 8 res StopEOI Enters period PRINT LEFT res INSTR res CHR 10 1 cmd FETCh PWIDth CALL Send 0 8 cmd EndEOI CALL Receive 0 8 res StopEOI Enters positive pulse width PRINT LEFT res INSTR res CHR 10 1 cmd FETCh NWIDth CALL Send 0 8 cmd EndEOI CALL Receive 0 8 res StopEOI Enters negative pulse width PRINT LEFT res INSTR res CHR 10 1 NEXT i PRINT CALL errorcheck END 4 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES A 1 2 Making programmed measurements In the following examp
118. HAMMing HANNing DIS Play WINDow 1 TEXT lt n gt DATA CALCulate 1 2 TRANsform F RE Quency TY PE FILTER MATHEMATICS key MATH menu MATH softkeys n z1 6 MATH1 2 filter ON OFF PARAM window samples SYSTem KEY 111 DISPlay MENU MATH SYSTem KEY n CALCulate 1 2 F ILTer F REQuency S TATe CALCulate 1 2 F ILTer F REQuency P OINts GLITCH triggering TRIGger TYPE GLITch HISTOGRAM MATHPLUS key MATH menu MATH softkeys n l 6 MATH1 2 histogram ON OFF SYSTem KEY 111 DISPlay MENU MATH SYSTem KEY n CALCulate 1 2 TRANsform HISTogram S TATe HOLD OFF TRIGger HOLDoff Identification and SYSTem VERSion INPUT ATTENUATOR SENSe VOLTage lt n gt DC R ANGe PTP eak key AUTO RANGE channel n key mv A CH1 key AMPLv v key mv A CH2 keyAMPLv w CH2 key mv A CH3 keyAMPLv w CH3 key AMPL mv A CH4 key AMPLv v CH4 key AMPL EXT SENSe VOLTage lt n gt DC R ANGe AUTO SYSTem KEY 702 SYSTem KEY 802 SYSTem KEY 705 SYSTem KEY 805 SYSTem KEY 708 P M33x4B SYSTem KEY 808 P M33x4B SYSTem KEY 711 PM33x4B SYSTem KEY 811 PM33x4B SYSTem KEY 712 PM33x0B CROSS REFERENCES FUNCTION KEYS MENUS INPUT COUPLING key ON toggled ON key ON CH1 key ON CH2 key ON CH3 key ON CH4 key TRIG VIEW EXT keyAC DC GND CH1 key AC DC GND CH2 key AC DC GND CH3 key AC DC GND CH4 key AC DC EXT RE
119. IGH MINimum etc use the voltage parameters for that purpose Measure functions such as fall and rise time frequency and period use time units Their expected value and desired resolution are specified in seconds or Hertz as separate measure parameters Examples MEASure VOLTage FREQuency 10E6 3 This query measures the frequency of the signal at input channel 3 The expected frequency is 10 MHz whereas the expected voltage is defaulted Notice that this command is equivalent to the MEASure FREQuency 10E6 3 command MEASure VOLTage FREQuency 5 10E6 23 This query does the same as the previous example except that the expected voltage is 5 volts USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 11 3 33 Waveform measurements The following figure shows the terms used for pulse measurements and the key words that are used as header nodes in the measurement instructions f TMAXimum MAXimum RISE RISETMEf FALL a PREShoot RISE FALL ERR 18 PREShoot OVERshoot TMINimum PWIDth NWIDth a PERiod ST7154 Figure 3 2 Pulse characteristics The reference high and low parameters determine the desired interval for rise time and fall time measurements The default low and high references are 10 and 90 of the pulse amplitude HIGH LOW Default REFerence LOW LOW 0 1 HIGH LOW Default REFerence HIGH LOW 0 9 HIGH L
120. LATED SCPI COMMAND S INP ut lt n gt COUP ling AC DC GR Ound SENSe FUNCtion SYSTem KEY 803 SYSTem KEY 806 SYSTem KEY 809 SYSTem KEY 812 SYSTem KEY 812 SYSTem KEY 804 SYSTem KEY 807 SYSTem KEY 810 SYSTem KEY 813 P M33x4B SYSTem KEY 813 P M33x0B P M33x4B P M33x4B P M33x0B P M33x4B INPUT IMPEDANCE key VERT MENU menu VERT MENU NPut lt n gt IMPedance SYSTem KEY 504 DISPlay MENU VERTical 500 CH n NPut lt n gt IMPedance INTEGRATE MATHPLUS key MATH SYSTem KEY 111 menu MATH DISPlay MENU MATH softkeys n l 6 MATH1 2 integrate ON OFF SYSTem KEY n CALCulate 1 2 NTegral S TATe LOGIC TRIGGER key TRIGGER menu TRIGGER softkeys n 1 6 TRIG slope TRIG source TRIGger TY PE LOGic SYSTem KEY 209 DISPlay MENU TRIGger SYSTem KEY n TRIGger SLOPe TRIGger SOURCe MAGNIFY HORIZONTAL key MAGNIFY 4 key MAGNIFY SYSTem KEY 210 SYSTem KEY 211 MAGNIFY VERTICAL key DISPLAY menu DISPLAY softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY 112 DISPlay MENU DIS Play SYSTem KEY n MAIN TIME BASE key TIME DIV VAR s lt key TIME DIV VAR ns key AUTO RANGE SENSe SWEep TIME SYSTem KEY 410 SYSTem KEY 411 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO 22 CROSS REFERENCES FUNCTION KEYS MENUS MATHEMATICS key MATH menu MATH softkeys n 1 6 RELATED SCPI COMMAND S CALCulate 1 2 DISPlay MENU MATH SYSTem KEY n MEASURE MENU key MEASURE
121. LINE TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo SSIGnal POLarity TRIGger STARt VIDeo SSIGnal POLarity Syntax Alias Query form Alias Response Query form Alias Response TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo LINE lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger SEQuencef 1 VIDeo SSIGnal POLarity POSitive NEGative TRIGger STARt VIDeo LINE lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger STARt VIDeo SSIGnal POLarity POSitive NEGative lt NRf gt 1 1250 1 MINimum Selects video line 1 1250 MAXimum Selects video line 1250 only for HDTV POSitive Selects positive video signal polarity NEGative Selects negative video signal polarity TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo LINE MINimum MAXimum TRIGger STARt VIDeo LINE MINimum MAXimum 1 1250 The minimum and maximum number of lines per frame depends on the TV standard specified If for example HDTV was selected MINimum returns 1 and MAXimum returns 1250 TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo SSIGnal POLarity TRIGger STARt VIDeo SS IGnal POLarity POS NEG POS Positive video signal polarity selected NEG Negative video signal polarity selected COMMAND REFERENCE 4 183 Description The TRIGger VIDeo LINE command selects the video line number Depending on the video system selected the following ranges are valid gt NTSC from 1 to 525 gt PAL or SECAM from 1 to 625 HDTV from 1 to 1250 The TRIGger VIDeo SSIGnal command selects the video signal polari
122. LL Receive 0 8 result 256 Reads AC RMS value PRINT AC RMS value result Prints AC RMS value END ServReq PRINT Service request generated because of Operation Completed CALL ReadStatusByte 0 8 sbyte Serial polls for the status byte to reset the SRQ mechanism PRINT STB byte sbyte CALL Send 0 8 xESR 1 r Queries for the contents of the Event Status Register to clear the OPC bit resp on CALL Receive 0 8 5 256 PRINT ESR byte resp SRQ detected 1 RETURN 3 76 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 15 4 How to report errors Instrument errors usually caused by programming or setting errors can be reported by the instrument during the execution of each command To make sure that a program is running properly you should query the instrument for possible errors after every functional command This is done by sending the SYSTem ERRor query or the STATus QUEue query to the instrument followed by reading the response message However through this practice the same error reporting statements must be repeated after sending each SCPI command This is not always practical Therefore one of the following approaches is advised 1 Send the SYSTem ERRor or STATus QUEue query and read the instru ment response message after every group of commands that functionally belong to each other 2 Program an error reporting routine and call this routine after each command or group
123. MODE multi Example Send RST Resets the instrument Send TRIGger SOURce INTernall Trigger source becomes channel 1 Send TRIGger LEVel 2 Trigger level becomes 0 2 Send INITiate Single shot acquisition Send TRACe CH1 Queries channel 1 trace Read lt acquisition trace channel 1 Note For single shot averaged acquisitions the trigger source must be one of the input shannels INTerval n instead if IMMediate software automatic trigger Errors When an INITiate command is given while the trigger system is not in the IDLE state the message 213 Init ignored is generated 4 62 COMMAND REFERENCE INPut n COUPIing Syntax INPut lt n gt COUPling AC DC GROund n 1112131 4 Query form INPut lt n gt COUPling lt n gt 11121314 Response 0 Description Selects the vertical input coupling of a specified n input channel If AC is specified the DC offset value is excluded If DC is specified the DC offset value is included If GROund is specified the AC value is grounded zeroed After a RST command the coupling is DC Restrictions For the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments channel 3 is not applicable and the input coupling of channel 4 EXT TRIG can only be set to AC or DC Example Send RST Resets the instrument DC coupled Send CONFigure AC 82 Configures for channel 2 AC RMS Send SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe VOLTage2 Sets chan
124. NE 512 Selects video line number 512 3 Select video field1 2 triggering and program the line to trigger on Examples TRIGger VIDeo FIELd SELect NUMBer Selects video field triggering TRIGger VIDeo FIELd NUMBer 2 Selects the video field2 trigger mode TRIGger VIDeo FORMat TYPE PAL Selects the PAL standard with 625 lines per frame TRIGger VIDeo LINE 123 Selects video line number 123 As a result the video mode is automatically switched to field field1 lines 1 312 TRIGger VIDeo LINE 325 Selects video line number 325 As a result the video mode is automatically switched to field2 field2 lines 313 625 TRIGger VIDeo FIELd NUMBer 1 Selects the video field trigger mode As a result the video line number is automatically switched to 13 2 325 625 2 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 4 1 3 trigger modes A combination of the INITiate CONTinuous and TRIGger SOURce command allows you to define the following trigger modes INITiate TRIGger Trigger mode CONTinuous SOURce gt gt gt Single shot lt lt lt Generates one sweep regardless of any OFF IMMediate trigger settings valid after RST Single shot INTernal lt n gt Generates one sweep triggered using OFF or trigger settings LINE gt gt gt Single shot lt lt lt Generates one sweep externally triggered OFF EXTernal via channel 4 only for PM33x0B gt gt gt Auto trig lt lt lt G
125. NRf gt The cutoff frequency expressed in hertz The only possible value is 30000 which defines HF reject LF pass Boolean 0 OFF Sets high pass filter off 1 ON Sets high pass filter on TRIGger SEQuence 1 FILTer HPASs FREQuency MINimum MAXimum TRIGger STARt FlLTer HPASs FREQuency MINimum MAXimum 3 00E 04 1 00E 08 2 00E 08 3 00E 04 Fixed cutoff frequency of 30 KHz MINimum 1 00E 08 Bandwidth of 100 MHz MAXimum for PM338xB 2 00E 08 Bandwidth of 200 MHz MAXimum for PM339xB TRIGger SEQuence 1 FILTer HPASs STATe TRIGger SEQuence 1 FILTer HPASs STATe 011 0 Low pass filter active 1 High pass filter active HF reject 4 116 COMMAND REFERENCE Description TRIGger FILTer HPASs FREQuency command sets the MTB cutoff frequency always at the fixed value of 30000 Hz all values are rounded to 30 KHz The TRIGger FILTer HPASs STATe command activates ON or deactivates OFF the MTB high pass filter Activating the MTB high pass filter automatically deactivates the MTB low pass filter Sets the high pass cutoff frequency at 30 KHz HF reject Sets the low pass cutoff frequency at 0 Hz DeActivating the MTB low pass filter automatically activates the MTB low pass filter Sets the high pass cutoff frequency at bandwidth 60 100 200 MHz Sets the low pass cutoff frequency at 0 Hz DC coupling After a RST command the high pass filter is OFF Note f
126. OFFSet TIME command is the remote equivalent of the front panel TRIGGER POSITION key COMMAND REFERENCE 4 81 SENSe SWEep PDETection STATe Syntax SENSe SWEep PDETection STATe Boolean Query form SENSe SWEep PDETection STATe Response 0 1 0 Peak detection switched off 1 Peak detection switched on Description Switches peak detection on or off If peak detection is switched on the MTB range is limited to sequential sampling from 250 nanoseconds through 200 seconds per division for MTB ranges refer to the SENSe SWEep TIME command For limitations on the peak detection speed width of a glitch refer to the function PEAK DETECTION of chapter 5 in the Operating Guide In the analog mode the error message 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated After a RST command peak detection is switched off Example Send gt CONFigure PTPeak Configures for Peak To Peak Send INITIate CONTinuous ON Sets Auto run mode Send DISPlay MENU MEASure Displays MEASURE menu Send SYSTem KEY 2 Sets MEAS1 Send gt SENSe SWEep PDETection on Sets peak detection on Send gt DISPlay WINDow TEXT1 DATA Queries MEAS1 data Read lt lt pkpk 9438E 03 V Front panel compliance The SENSe SWEep PDETection command is the remote equivalent of the front panel ACQUIRE PEAK DET on off softkey menu 4 82 COMMAND REFERENCE SENSe SWEep REALtime STATe
127. OW In a similar way the reference middle parameter determines the desired interval for pulse width PWIDth NWIDth and duty cycle PDUTycycle NDUTycycle measurements When defaulted the reference middle value is assumed to be at 50 of the amplitude Default REFerence MIDDle LOW 0 5 HIGH LOW 3 12 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS Examples MEASure FALL TIME 93 Measures the time interval during which the pulse at channel 3 decreases from 9096 to 10 of its amplitude MEASure RISE TIME 20 80 Measures the time interval during which the pulse at the default channel 1 increases from 2096 to 80 of its amplitude The following measure functions and parameters can be programmed measure function measure parameters AMPLitude DC FALL OVERshoot PREShoot TIME lt reference_low gt lt reference_high gt lt expected_time gt lt time_resolution gt FREQuency expected frequency lt frequency_resolution gt HIGH LOW MAXimum MINimum NDUTycycle lt reference_middle gt NWIDth reference middle PDUTycycle reference middle PERiod expected period lt period_resolution gt PTPeak PWIDth reference middle TMAXimum TMINimum RISE OVERshoot PREShoot TIME lt reference_low gt lt reference_high gt lt expected_time gt lt time_resolution gt Notes DCYCle alias for PDUTycycle FTIMe alias for FALL TIME HTIMe
128. P7550 Plotter HP7475A Plotter HP7470A Plotter PM8277 Plotter PM8278 Printer FX80 Epson FX80 compatibles 9 points Printer HP2225 ThinkJet Printer LQ1500 Epson LQ150 compatibles 24 points Printer HPLASER HP LaserJet series II amp Ill Printer HP540 HP DeskJet new style protocol Generator DUMP 1 Trace dump to one of the arbitrary waveform generators PM5138 PM5139 or PM5150 The HCOPy DATA query allows you to request a hardcopy of the picture on the screen of your CombiScope instrument The response data is formatted according to the current printer plotter options which can be selected via the front panel UTILITY menu After a RST command the option plotter HPGL is selected The response data to a HCOPy DATA query can be sent to a connected plotter or printer to make a hardcopy The response data is sent as block data of indefinite length and is therefore preceded by the preamble 0 of 2 bytes This preamble must be removed from the beginning of the block data before sending it to a plotter or printer device USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 67 pso ead PLOTTER send 1 Send the query 1 data piot print HCOPy DATA via the GPIB aa PRINTER 2 Read the block response 3 data via the GPIB Send the print plot data part to the printer plotter buffer 99 send HCOPy DATA CONTROLLER ST7219 Figure 3 22 Hardcopy of screen on printer plotter PROGRAM EXAMPLE Se
129. RDS INFORMATION D 1 APPENDIX D STANDARDS INFORMATION D 1 SCPI Conformance Information commands comply to the SCPI standard 1994 0 except for the following The RST condition of the SENSe VOLTage lt n gt DC RANGe AUTO ON OFF command Exception After RST autoranging MTB is switched off The RST condition of the SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO ON OFF command Exception After RST autoranging attenuators CH1 CH2 CH3 and CH4 are switched off The device parameter of the HCOPy DEVice type command Exception HCOPy DEVice command allows to select the hardcopy device by specifying its name or type number e g type HPLASER or LQ1500 In addition the following commands are implemented CALCulate TRANsform FREQuency TYPE ABSolute RELative command Purpose To allow the selection of absolute or relative FFT calculation The TRIGger SEQuence 1 STARt VIDeo FORMat TYPE type command Purpose To allow the selection of a TV standard by specifying its name or abbreviation e g type HDTV The SYSTem SET node number query Purpose To allow the instrument settings to be saved and restored in functional groups nodes as specified by the node numbers D 2 STANDARDS INFORMATION D 2 List of Implemented IEEE 488 2 Syntactical Elements The following list of elements is used in the common and SCPI commands PROGRAM MESSAGE Represents a sequence of zero or m
130. Represents an expression between parentheses Example 1 2 STANDARDS INFORMATION D 3 PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT SEPARATOR gt Separates the PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT elements from one another in a PROGRAM 55 gt Only the semicolon is allowed as program message unit separator PROGRAM DATA SEPARATOR gt Separates sequential PROGRAM DATA elements that are related to the same command program header Only the colon is allowed as program data separator PROGRAM HEADER SEPARATOR gt Separates the command program header from any associated PROGRAM DATA Any one of the white space characters decimal 0 to 9 or 1 to 32 is allowed PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR Terminates a PROGRAM gt The following combinations are allowed NL END This is the NewLine code decimal 10 sent concurrently with the END message on the GPIB NL This is the NewLine code decimal 10 lt dab gt END This is the END message concurrently sent with the last data byte dab COMMAND PROGRAM HEADER Specifies a function or operation Used with any associated PROGRAM DATA element QUERY PROGRAM HEADER Similar to COMMAND PROGRAM HEADERs except the query indicator at the end shows that a response is expected from the device SUMMARY OF SYSTEM SETTINGS E 1 APPENDIX E SUMMARY OF SYSTEM SETTINGS The following table identifies which instrument settings belong to which node
131. Requests for channel 1 trace CALL Receive 0 8 tracel 256 Reads channel 1 trace into trace1 CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate FEED CH1 1 Inputsource 1 CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate FILTer FREQuency STATe ON 1 Enables frequency filtering the filtered channel 1 trace is stored in M1 1 CALL Send 0 8 TRACe M1 1 1 Requests for M1 1 trace CALL Receive 0 8 trace2 256 Reads 1 1 trace into trace2 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 61 3 11 Screen Display Functions 3 11 1 Brightness control The DISPlay BRIGhtness command allows you to control the brightness of the trace s displayed on the screen of your CombiScope instrument on a scale from 0 0 low to 1 0 high After a RST command the brightness intensity is 0 18 PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay BRIGhtness 3 1 brightness at 0 3 3 11 2 Display functions The DISPlay WINDow and DISPlay MENU commands allow you to use the following display functions e WINDowl1 functions use the front panel screen display of MEAS1 MEAS2 CURSORS and MATH FFT to read measurement data from the CombiScope instrument refer to section 3 11 2 1 e WINDow2 function to write user defined text on the screen refer to section 3 11 2 2 e The MENU function to display softkey menus the screen refer to section 3 11 2 3 The layout of the display areas on the screen is as follows WINDow 1 MENU
132. S key MEASURE menu MEASURE softkeys n 1 6 MEAS 1 amp MEAS 2 dc voltage rms voltage amplitude voltage max voltage min voltage peak to peak voltage high level voltage low level voltage falling overshoot voltage falling preshoot voltage rising overshoot voltage rising preshoot voltage RELATED SCPI COMMAND S SYSTem KEY 110 DISPlay MENU MEASure SYSTem KEY n DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT lt 1 2 gt DATA MEASure DC MEASure AC MEASure AMP Litude EASure MAXimum MEASure MINimum MEAS ure PTP eak MEAS ure HIG H MEASure LOW MEASure FALL OVER shoot MEASure FALL PRES hoot MEASure RISE OVER shoot MEASure RISE PRES hoot Note MEASure can be substituted by CONFigure READ or by CONFigure INITiate FETCh X DEFLECTION X DEFL X vs Y key DISPLAY menu DISPLAY softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY 209 DISPlay MENU DISPlay SYSTem KEY n Notes The functions keys menus and related SCPI commands for the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments are not applicable for channel 3 available for channel 4 as external trigger input MANUAL CONVENTIONS C 1 APPENDIX C MANUAL CONVENTIONS C 1 Abbreviations Used ABBREVIATIONS USED in alphabetical order ADC AH ANSI ASCII C CAL CLS CME CR lt dab gt DC L DDE dec DSO DT EBNF eg EOI EOL ESB ESC ESE ESR EXT FIFO G
133. STATus OPERation NTRansition 4 Enables report of Autoranging stopped 1 gt 0 Send STATus OPERation EVENt Requests for operational event Read lt 4 The returned value 4 equals bit 2 set instrument has stopped autoranging 4 92 COMMAND REFERENCE STATus PRESet Syntax STATus PRESet Description The PRESet command is used to set the status data structure in such a way that device dependent events are reported at a higher level through the mandatory part of the status reporting mechanism The PRESet command affects only the enable registers and the transition filters for the device dependent status data structures PRESet does not clear any of the event registers Note Bit 15 of the 16 bit registers in the Status system is not used and remains zero Bit 15 always returns zero when reading these registers The following table defines the effect of STATus PRESet STATUS REGISTER FILTER ENABLE PRESET VALUE OPERation ENABle 0000 hex PTRansition 7FFF hex NTRansition 0000 hex QUEStionable ENABle 0000 hex PTRansition 7FFF hex NTRansition 0000 hex Example Send gt STATus PRESet Presets the status registers as indicated above COMMAND REFERENCE 4 93 STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition
134. Se AVERage ON This enables the AVERAGE function When SENSe AVERage is set to ON and an acquisition is initiated the CombiScope instrument takes n SENSe AVERage COUNt successive acquisitions as shown in the figure on the next page When sufficient acquisitions are taken the final averaged result is returned Intermediate results cannot be queried PROGRAM EXAMPLE Acquire the trace of the actual signal on channel 1 and measure the amplitude and frequency averaged over 4 acquisitions DIM trace AS STRING 1033 Dimensions trace string DIM amplitude AS STRING 10 Dimensions amplitude string DIM frequency AS STRING x 10 Dimensions frequency string CALL Send 0 8 CONFigure AC 1 1 Configures for AC RMS CALL Send 0 8 SENSe AVERage COUNt 4 1 Average factor 4 CALL Send 0 8 SENSe AVERage ON 1 Averaging is turned on CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 nitiates the averaging acquisition CALL Send 0 8 amp WAI TRACe CH1 1 Queries for channel 1 trace CALL Receive 0 8 trace 256 Enters channel 1 trace The trace samples are averaged over 4 sequential trace acquisitions CALL Send 0 8 READ AMPLitude 1 Reads the amplitude CALL Receive 0 8 amplitude 256 Enters the amplitude CALL Send 0 8 FETCh FREQuency 1 Fetches the frequency CALL Receive 0 8 frequency 256 Enters the frequency The amplitude and frequency are averaged over 4 sequential measured values
135. Syntax STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt NRf gt STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt NRf gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Range from 0 to 32767 Query form STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable NTRansition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition Response lt 1 gt Description The STATus QUEStionable CONDition query reports the contents of the questionable condition register Reading a condition register has no effect on its contents The decimal value that is returned is the summation of the decimal value bit weight of the individual bits that have been set The STATus QUEStionable ENABle command sets the contents of the questionable event enable register Setting a bit in the event enable register allows a true condition in the event register to be reported in the summary bit in the status byte register STB If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transition is true a positive transition occurs in the questionable summary bit After power on the enable mask is set to 0 The STATus QUEStionable query reports and clears the contents of the questionable event register Reading an event register has the effect of clearing its contents The decimal value that is returned is the summation of the decimal value bit weight of the individual bits that have been set After power on the contents of the event register
136. TB MODE softkeys n 1 6 SYSTem KEY 409 DISPlay MENU TBMode SYSTem KEY n ACQ LENGTH TRACe POINts trace length FORMat DATA trace data TRACe DATA trace copy TRACe COPY ADD INVERT SUBTRACT key CH14CH2 SENSe FUNCtion XTIME VOLTage SUM 1 2 key INV CH2 INP ut2 P OLarity key CH3 CH4 SENSe FUNCtion XTIME VOLTage SUM 3 4 key INV CH4 INP ut4 POLarity ADD MATHEMATICS key MATH SYSTem KEY 111 menu MATH DISPlay MENU MATH softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY n MATH1 2 ON OFF CALCulate 1 2 MATH STATe add CALCulate 1 2 EMATH EXP Ression ALT CHOP key TB MODE SYSTem KEY 409 menu TB MODE softkeys n 1 6 DISPlay MENU TBMode SYSTem KEY n ANALOG MODE key ANALOG INSTrumentNSE Lect ANALog INSTrument SE Lect 2 SYSTem KEY 106 AUTO RANGE key AUTO RANGE MTB key AUTO RANGE CH1 MTB SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO CH1 key AUTO RANGE CH2 CH3 CH4 SENSe VOLTagel DC JRANGe AUTO SENSe VOLTage2 DC JRANGe AUTO SENSe VOLTage3 DC JRANGe AUTO SENSe VOLTage4 DC JRANGe AUTO key AUTO RANGE CH3 key AUTO RANGE CH4 18 CROSS REFERENCES FUNCTION KEYS MENUS RELATED SCPI COMMAND S AUTOSET key AUTOSET SYSTem KEY 101 AUTOSET SEQUENCE key STATUS SYSTem KEY 201 key TEXT OFF SYSTem KEY 801 menu UTILITY AUTOSET or PROBE DISPlay MENU UTIL softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY n AUTOSET USERPROG key UTILITY SYSTem KEY 104 menu UTILITY AUTOSET DISPlay MEN
137. TRansition numeric data range 0 32767 PRESet no query QUE Stionable EVENt query only CONDition query only numeric data range 0 32767 NTRansition numeric data range 0 32767 PTRansition numeric data range 0 32767 QUEue NEXT query only 4 10 COMMAND REFERENCE COMMAND PARAMETERS NOTES SYSTem BEEPer STATe lt Boolean gt SERial CONTrol DTR ON STAN dard RTS ON STANdard RECeive TRANsmit BAUD numeric value 15 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 BITS lt numeric_value gt 7 8 PACE XON NONE PAR ity TYPe EVEN ODD NONE DATE lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt ERRor query only KEY NRf MAXimum MINimum lt NRf gt 1 6 101 113 1 1 801 813 SET indefinite block SET lt node_number gt response lt indefinite_block gt TIME lt NRf gt lt NRf gt lt NR f gt lt hour gt lt minute gt lt second gt VERSion query only TRACe alias DATA COPY lt destination_trace gt lt source_trace gt destination trace Mi n source trace CHn n EXT 1 4 i z1 8 standard i 1 50 extended DATA destination trace definite block POINtS source trace NRf MAXimum MINimum NRf standard 512 2048 4096 8192 NRf extended 512 8192 16384 327
138. TUS BITS bit5 bit 3 STATE DESCRIPTION Wait for TRIG SWEeping OPC idle state after RST 0 0 0 Wait for trigger state INIT received 1 0 0 armed Wait for complete triggered 0 1 0 busy Finished with acquisition 0 0 1 ready The bits 3 SWEeping and 5 Waiting for TRIGger also reflect the acquisition status when the SINGLE ARM D button on the front panel was pressed Commands SYSTem KEY 101 DISPlay MENU TBMode SYSTem KEY 1 Performs AutoSet Displays TBMODE menu Sets INIT CONT OFF and sets multiple shot mode USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 27 3 4 1 4 Pre and post triggering When pre triggering is selected the real trace acquisition begins before the moment that the trigger occurs Triggering occurs when the trigger conditions are satisfied and the instrument leaves the Wait for TRIGger state as shown in the trigger diagram of figure 3 3 In a similar way post triggering causes the acquisition to begin after the moment that the trigger occurs trigger moment e 1 i SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME 1 pre trigger i i i 1 i Y Trace time axis _ begin end f total acquisition time i SENSe SWEep TIME ST7190 trigger moment Figure 3 8 t SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME post trigger 1 Tr ace time axis _ begin end total acquisition time gt SENSe SWEep TIME
139. U UTIL softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY n AVERAGE SENSe AVERage STATe SENSe AVERage TY PE key AVERAGE SYSTem KEY 507 key ACQUIRE SYSTem KEY 107 menu ACQUIRE softkeysn 1 6 TRACK select average factor DIS Play MENU ACQuire SYSTem KEY n SENSe AVERage COUNt BANDWIDTH LIMITER key VERT MENU menu VERT MENU NPut lt n gt FILTer LPAS s F REQuency SYSTem KEY 504 DISPlay MENU VERTical softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY n BW LIMIT NPut lt n gt FILTer LPAS s S TATe CALIBRATION AUTOCAL CALibration ALL key CAL xCAL CHANNEL TRACE SELECTION SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe Voltage lt n gt key ON CH1 SYSTem KEY 803 key ON CH2 SYSTem KEY 806 key ON CH3 SYSTem KEY 809 key ON CH4 SYSTem KEY 812 key RECALL SYSTem KEY 109 menu RECALL trace register DISPlay MENU RECall softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY n CONFIDENCE CHECK xTST CURSORS TIME VOLT BOTH SYSTEM SET 32 key CURSORS SYSTem KEY 204 menu CURSORS DISPlay MENU CURSors softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY n CROSS REFERENCES 19 FUNCTION KEYS MENUS CURSOR READOUT RELATED SCPI COMMAND S key CURSORS SYSTem KEY 204 menu CURSORS DISPlay MENU CURSors READOUT DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT n DATA DELAY SENSe SWEep OFFSetTIME menu TB MODE EVENT DELAY softkeys n 1 6 select pos neg slope DISPlay MENU TBMode SYSTem KEY n TRIGger SLOPe DELAY MEASUREMENT key MEASURE menu MEASURE MEAS1 2 softkeysn 1 6 SYSTe
140. XAMPLE ok kk ke Calibrate the instrument and print the calibration result kckck ck CALL Send 0 8 CAL 1 Starts the calibration CALL IbTMO 0 0 Disables the time out mechanism response CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Waits for the calibration to finish and reads the result CALL 0 13 Sets time out back to 10 seconds IF LEFT response 1 0 THEN 0 okay PRINT Calibration okay ELSE l wrong PRINT Calibration not successful ENDIF PROGRAMMING NOTE Status bit 0 in the operation status can be used to generate a Service Request SRQ when the calibration is finished i e when bit 0 becomes zero This gives you the advantage that the program can do something else until the SRQ is generated Therefore program the following ON PEN GOSUB ServReq Defines ServR eq routine call after SRQ PEN ON Enables SRQ mechanism Send STATus OPERation NTRansition 1 Sets bit 0 Calibration true in the case of negative transition from 1 to 0 Send STATus OPERation ENABle 1 Enables bit 0 for being reported in the standard status byte STB Send SRE 128 Enables bit 7 OPER in Service Request Enable SRE register for generation of an SRQ Send RST Resets the instrument Send CLS Clears the status data Send CALibration Starts auto calibration 3 70 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 15 Status Reporting Status reporting is done
141. XT i CLOSE Closes file TRACE5 DAT Note Refer to section 3 4 3 Conversion of trace data about how to convert this string data GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING 2 9 2 5 Measuring Signal Characteristics The measurement instructions allow you to make a complete measurement This includes the configuration of the instrument the initiation of the trigger system and the fetching of the acquisition data The measurement instructions can be used at different levels varying in processing time The highest level is the most easy to use but takes more time to complete than the lowest level The following levels of measurement instructions can be used The highest level MEASure easy to use The middle level CONFigure READ equivalent to MEASure gives more programming flexibility The lowest level INITiate FETCh equivalent to READ to acquire more signal characteristics The following table shows which measurement tasks are executed by the measurement instructions MEASure CONFigure READ INITiate FETCh Configures the instrument YES YES Initiates the trigger system YES YES YES Fetches the acquired data YES YES YES 2 10 GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING 2 5 1 How to make a single shot measurement The MEASure query allows you to make a single shot measurement and the FETCh query allows you to fetch more signal characteristics PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5k kk Mea
142. Y 4 5 HOC olog RUN STOP RANGE SINGLE ARM D INIT CIT eem TIME DIV 2 C3 DTB s TIME DIV ns 5 ns TRIG LEV 3 AVERAGE z SENS SWE TIME 4 4 C3 E Tu Tu SENS SWE TIME AUTO Ir TNR Vii 5 C AUTO AUTE INV AMPL RANGE MAPL PANGE INV 6 ML CUA H E um GND ON GND t ON GND OE INP2 POL SENS AVER Any softkey menu DISP MENU menu name Softkey 1 6 ALSO FOR CHANNEL 2 3 AND 4 SYST KEY 1 6 TRACE INTENSITY DISP BRIG ON ST7431 SENS FUNC XTIM VOLT SUM 1 2 STAT TRIG SOUR INT1 POS TRIG SLOP NEG Notes Channel 4 is external trigger inp Channel 3 is not applicable for PM33x0B ut for EXT TRIG A TRIG SLOP SENS VOLT4 RANG PTP 4 J ON TRIG SENS FUNC QFE XTM VOLT L INPA COUP ST7722 CROSS REFERENCES B 3 B 2 Cross Reference Softkey Menus Commands The menu pictures are copied from or refer to menus in the operation guide The relationship to the corresponding SCPI command s is also shown B 2 1 ACQUIRE menu DIGITAL TRACK AVERAGE M aE O lt SENS AVER COUN ACQUIRE lt SENs swe PDET i ON 4 NP FILT OFF ST7432 B 4 CROSS REFERENCES B 2 2 CURSORS menu Programmable with the SAV
143. a read the calculated frequency from the instrument A single simple SCPI query replaces all of the above namely the MEASure FREQuency query which does the following auto configures the oscilloscope to the best possible setting for the requested measurement task Note This process is different from the traditional AUTOSET process in that the autoset function determines the instrument settings based on the input signal only whereas the auto configure algorithm also takes the desired measurement task into account Starts the acquisition process takes care that the measurement is triggered calculates the desired characteristic from the acquired data returns the calculated value USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 5 The measurement instructions are easy to use and do not require any special knowledge of the instrument The programming concept reduces simple measurement tasks with complex instruments to simple instructions leaving the setup complexity to the instrument The measurement instructions are extremely useful when the application does not require the precise setting of instrument functions The concept is extendible with separate control of parameters that are vital to the application 3 2 2 Single function programming using the instrument model All major instrument functions such as time base input impedance etc are separately programmable using single parameter commands The easy to understand co
144. a a 3 49 4 38 REIN 4 62 4 67 4 116 4 118 4 124 26 ssa Red oett RA ON 3 21 3 22 4 117 Acquisition 2 6 3 18 3 19 3 36 3 43 3 58 3 59 3 60 4 31 4 43 4 55 4 60 4 61 4 73 4 74 4 82 4 111 Acquisition length 2 6 3 42 3 56 3 57 4 24 4 72 4 84 4 114 B 11 B 17 ACQUISITION nto acces ease wade ata Re Pepe cR enna 4 33 ADC TET 3 31 3 43 Add ic iue e dE Aes VE EH 4 36 B 7 B 17 Addition of input 3 38 4 79 AliaS pesca Ge V exu ee DR 4 13 Aliasirig a rera tme ERU MED RC edes 3 44 hp TL ETE 17 AlternatiVe e der euer panes 4 2 Amplitude eee gi peek Dade 3 34 4 67 28 2 4 4 66 17 Arbitrary block program data D 2 Armed oae RI dev ew eei qe wee us 3 26 Attenuators ee Sb ken i rath AT ee und d 4 86 4 89 Auto level peak peak 4 121 Auto range ssec ea GR Reset d Mte x Lad B 17 Autori REDDE etie eb LED 3 25 Automatic A 2 Automatic
145. across different nodes For these reasons instrument settings must not be changed individually Appendix E summarizes which instrument settings belong to which node If the lt node_nr gt doesn t exist the error message 222 Data out of range reserved for future use is generated If the lt node_nr gt is not applicable for this instrument the error message 222 Data out of range reserved for combi instrument is generated 4 106 COMMAND REFERENCE Limitations For the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments Input channel CH3 is not applicable Input channel 4 is limited to external trigger view Example Send SYSTem SET 32 Queries for cursor instrument settings Read curs setup Reads cursor instrument settings Send gt SYSTem SET Queries for all instrument settings Read settings Reads all instrument settings Send gt SYSTem SETSP Sends the header plus a space without message termination EOI off Send settings Sends all instrument settings plus message termination on Programming tip The number of settings bytes can be determined from the second byte of the returned settings information itself A node is always built up as follows node nr node length first byte last byte The second node length byte indicates the number of bytes to follow If no node nr was specified the number of bytes must be determined while
146. ak 0 8 Peak to peak 0 8V sensitivity 0 8 8 100 mV div Send TRIGger SOURce INTernal2 LEVel 2 Trigger source channel 2 level 0 2V Send SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe VOLTage2 Switches channel 2 ON Send INITiate CONTinuous ON Initiates continuous acquisitions Front panel compliance The SENSe VOLTage lt n gt RANGe PTPeak command is the remote equivalent of the front panel AMPL mV VAR V keys 4 90 COMMAND REFERENCE STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation EVENt STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation PTRansition Syntax STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation ENABle lt NRf gt STATus OPERation EVENt STATus OPERation NTRansition lt NRf gt STATus OPERation PTRansition lt NRf gt lt NRf gt Range from 0 to 32767 Query form STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation PTRansition Response lt 1 gt Description The STATus OPERation CONDition query reports the contents of the operation condition register Reading a condition register has no effect on its contents The decimal value that is returned is the summation of the decimal value bit weight of the individual bits that have been set The STATus OPERation ENABle command sets the contents of the operation event enable register Setting a bit in the event enable register allows a true condition in the event register to be reported in the summary bit in the s
147. al for 8 bit samples Note A trace can only be written to memory register space Mi n and not to acquisition space CHn PROGRAM EXAMPLE DIM response AS STRING 2000 Dimensions trace buffer CALL Send 0 8 TRACe 1 1 Requests for channel 1 trace CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the channel 1 trace length IBCNT number of data bytes CALL Send 0 8 TRACe M2 3 0 Sends fixed command part without EOI CALL Send 0 8 LEFTS response length 0 Sends variable trace block without EOI CALL Send 0 8 1 Sends dummy string with EOI detection 3 60 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 10 4 Reading data from trace memory The TRACe query allows you to read the contents from one of the following trace memory registers e acquisition trace from one of the input channels CH1 to e Previously stored trace data from one of the memory registers M1 to M8 or to M50 This can be either an acquisition trace or a trace of constant values refer to section 3 10 3 e result of a post processing function CALCulate1 in M1 and CALCulate2 in M2 refer to section 3 9 Post processing PROGRAM EXAMPLE 5k Read the actual channel 1 trace into tracel and the filtered channel 1 trace into trace2 5k kk DIM tracel AS STRING 2000 Dimensions trace buffer 1 DIM trace2 AS STRING 2000 Dimensions trace buffer 2 CALL Send 0 8 TRACe 1 1
148. alias for RISE TIME USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 18 3 3 4 Customizing settings Often you need more precise control of the measurements than possible with the MEASure query The combination of CONFigure and READ is provided to allow you to program one or more settings that are vital to your application Executing this sequence of instructions is equivalent to sending MEASure For setting up the instrument CONFigure uses the same measure functions and parameters as MEASure The CONFigure command does the instrument setup portion of MEASure The READ query initiates the acquisition performs the needed calculations and returns the desired result Since READ no longer changes instrument settings commands that are executed after CONFigure but before READ are taken into effect by the acquisition This concept allows you to perform a generic configuration through CONFigure and then customize the measurement by programming the settings that are vital to your application Next the READ completes the measurement process Example CONFigure AC Configures the instrument to perform an RMS measurement of the AC component at the default input channel 1 SENSe AVERage ON Sets averaging on SENSe AVERage COUNT 4 Sets averaging factor at four READ AC Starts the measurement and returns the averaged AC RMS value READ uses the same measure functions and parameters as CONFigure After the instrument has been set up for a parti
149. alled e Repeat testt Initiate a single acquisition by sending INITiate CONTinuous OFF INITiate OPC e f is generated acquisition finished the dT cursor value is read and printed by sending DISPlay WINDow TEXT20 DATA Request to stop or to repeat this test do Repeat test1 again APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES A 7 e Routine ServReq does the following Serial polls the status byte to reset the SRQ mechanism Reads the ESR byte to clear the OPC bit Sets the SRQ detected flag to signal that an SRQ interrupt occurred e Routine Enter Setup does the following Requests for an internal memory n from 0 to 10 Sends the RCL n command to recall the memory setup e Routine Save Setup does the following Requests for an internal memory n from 1 to 10 Sendsthe SAV n command to save the setup into memory Application program Note program is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPA31 BAS A 3 2 Save recall settings to from computer disk memory The following example uses the store restore feature to from computer disk space 1 The program requests to store the current instrument setup to a file name on disk that must be entered if you respond with Y es 2 The program requests to restore an instrument setup from a file name on disk that must be entered if you respond with Y es 3 single shot cursor measurement is done Using the service request mechanism SRQ the
150. ame a cumbersome process which required a high learning curve for each new instrument and each additional instrument The time and costs to create and maintain application programs were unnecessarily high due to the lack of standardization With the introduction of the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments commonly called SCPI a lot of progress has been made in this area The development time of an application program for SCPI compatible instruments like the CombiScope instrument is considerably reduced This is mainly achieved by the consistent programming environment for instrument control and data usage across all types of instruments that regardless of the manufacturer is provided by SCPI The standardized commands allow the same functions in different types of instruments to be controlled by the same commands For example the query MEASure FREQuency acquires the frequency characteristic of the input signal regardless of whether the instrument is a frequency counter an oscilloscope or any other measuring instrument 3 2 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS As the example already shows the commands are easy to learn and self explanatory to both novice and expert users The learning curve is considerably decreased for new instruments or instrument functions with which the programmer is not familiar Efficiency is not only gained when creating or debugging new application programs The easily understandable programs great
151. ampling is not guaranteed In a similar way the time value Ts that is associated with a trace sample point can be calculated from the following expression Ts sample index SENSe SWEep TIME TRACE POINIs 1 where sample index is the point number of the sample in the trace After a RST command the sweep time is 10 milliseconds Coupled values There exists a coupling between programming of the sweep time and the number of trace points acquisition length The coupling is one way which means that the sweep time changes if the acquisition length changes Example Send gt RST The number of trace points is 512 Send SENSe SWEep TIME 04 The sweep time is specified at 40 ms The MTB becomes 0 04 50 511 which is rounded to 4 ms The result of this is that the sweep time is changed to 0 004 511 50 0 04088 seconds Send TRACe POINts CH1 4096 The number of trace points becomes 4096 instead of 512 The result of this is that the sweep time becomes 8 times as high Note When the magnifying factor is 1 always 500 sample points 10 x 50 of the total acquisition length are visible on the display So if the acquisition length is 4096 samples only 1 8 of the trace is displayed on the screen Example Send gt SENSe SWEep TIME Requests sweep time Read sweep time Reads sweep time Send TRACe POINts 1 Requests nr of trace points Read acq length Reads number
152. atures for instrument setups Saving and recalling can be done via internal memory refer to A 3 1 and remotely via computer disk space refer to A 3 2 These features can be used for non supported functions e g Cursor Measurements Before executing one of the programs in section A 3 1 or A 3 2 a cursor measurement setup must be done by hand via the front panel A 3 1 Save recall settings to from internal memory The following example uses the save recall feature to from internal instrument memory 1 The program requests to save the current instrument setup to a memory location that must be entered if you respond with Y es 2 The program requests to recall an instrument setup from a memory location that must be entered if you respond with Y es 3 A single shot cursor measurement is done Using the service request mechanism SRQ the end of the measurement is waited for Then as an example the dT cursor readout value is read and printed 4 Finally the program asks to stop or to perform a next measurement Application summary e Before running the program make a cursor measurement setup via the front panel CURSORS key and menu e Enable the SRQ mechanism to generate an interrupt after Operation Completed routine ServReq is executed e Request to save the current instrument setup If response Y es routine Save Setup is called e Request to recall an instrument setup If response Y es routine Enter Setup is c
153. bits 2 bytes or as 8 bits 1 byte After a RST command the number of trace sample bits is 16 2 bytes Notice that the contents of acquisition and register space is not cleared when a different trace format is programmed PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Length of trace samples 16 bits CALL Send 0 8 FORMat INTeger 8 1 Lengthoftrace samples 8 bits 3 58 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 10 2 Copying traces to memory The TRACe COPY command allows you to copy the contents of a memory register to another memory register This allows you to fill a memory register with traces from one of the following sources e an acquisition trace from one of the input channels Example Send gt TRACe COPY 1 2 CH2 Copies from CH2 to M1 2 Note The result of this command is also that the acquisition traces of other channels CHn are copied into M1 n provided channel CHn is on So all previously stored traces in M1 are lost e Copy a previously stored trace from another trace memory register Example Send gt TRACe COPY M2 2 M12 Copies from M1 2to M2 2 Note result of this command is also that all stored traces of M2 N are copied into M1 n provided a trace was stored before So all previously stored traces in M2 are lost PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Channel 1 on Channel 2 3 4 off CALL Send 0 8 SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe VOLTage3 1 Channel3also on CALL
154. bration ALL query Limitation The calibration process will last a couple of minutes During this time bit O in the OPERation status is set indicating that calibration is busy This status information can only be requested if the calibration was started via the front panel This is because the CAL query is a sequential command So a next command or query in the same program message is not executed until the calibration process is completed Until then no response to a next query is obtained Example Send CAL Read lt response Response is held up during calibration IF response 1 THEN PRINT calibration not successful Front panel compliance The CAL query is the remote equivalent of the front panel CAL key 4 16 COMMAND REFERENCE CLS Clear Status Syntax CLS Description The CLS command clears the following status data structures 1 Clears all Event Status Registers such as the following Standard Event Status Register ESR Status Byte Register STB Operation Event Status register STATus OPERation EVENt Questionable Event Status Register STATus QUEStionable EVENt 2 Clears the Error Event Queue 3 Cancels the effect of the OPC command and the OPC query any request for the OPC flag is cancelled Note When the CLS command is entered as the first command a new pro gram message it also clears the Output Queue and as a consequence the MAV bit in the Statu
155. bsystem For example a command that programs the input coupling is INPut COUPIing DC All programmable settings can be queried easily The query form is obtained from the command by simply removing the parameter and adding a question mark For example the command to program the input impedance of your oscilloscope is INPut IMPedance 50 This impedance value can be queried by sending INPut IMPedance which returns 50 3 2 3 Instrument setup This concept allows you to program instrument settings with a single command Several instrument setups can be saved either created by remote programming or by front panel control This concept can also be used to program instrument functions that cannot be directly accessed using individual program instructions Complete instrument setups can be saved either in the internal memory of the oscilloscope or externally in the remote controller A part of the instrument setup can also be saved externally The oscilloscope is equipped with a number of internal memories in which the complete instrument set up can be saved and from which it can be restored Send SAV Saves the current set up into memory 3 Send RCL Recalls the instrument set up that was saved in memory 3 Instead of using an internal oscilloscope memory the instrument setup can be queried using the SYSTem SET query The result of this query is that the oscilloscope sends a part or the complete setup in a compact block data format Sen
156. ce gt parameter aan Ee aS NS Notes 1 For reasons of compatibility with similar programs for other instruments the syntax for the MEASure FETCh CONFigure and READ command allows the default node SCALar When used this node must be placed after the leading node MEASure FETCh CONFigure or READ but before the default VOLTage node 2 Parenthesis around the voltage parameters may be left out when lt measure_parameter gt exists 3 AMEASure query is always executed over the whole acquisition length of 512 samples not cursor limited COMMAND REFERENCE 4 73 Description The MEASure queries are part of the measurement instruction set They provide an automatic measurement of the signal characteristics as specified by the measure function part in the query header In one operation the instrument is configured or set up the acquisition initiated and the result returned Execution of a MEASure query aborts any pending operation The parameters provide additional information about the signal to be measured or the result desired The oscilloscope uses these parameter values to provide the best possible settings for the specified task When the parameters are defaulted the oscilloscope chooses its own settings based upon the signal to be measured and its own trade offs After executing the MEASure query the instrument settings are undefined The default VOLTage node specifi
157. ce that is fed into the CALCulate function is changed If a mathematical function is switched on the other functions are automatically switched off USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 47 3 9 1 4 Check the result of the post processing function The results of the post processing functions MATH TRANsform FREQuency TRANsform HISTogram are stored in M1 1 for CALCulate1 and in M2 1 for CALCulate2 regardless of the input feed trace The results of the post processing functions FILTer FREQuency INTegral DERivative or DIFFerential are stored in M1 n or M2 n depending of the input source When CHn or Mi n is the input trace for CALCulate1 the result is placed in M1 n n 1 2 3 4 When or Mi nis the input trace for CALCulate2 the result is placed in M2 n n 1 2 3 4 Example Send CALCulate2 FEED CH3 Send CALCulate2 INTegral STATe ON The result is that the integral of the channel trace is placed 2 3 When the result of a calculation is saved in a trace memory location the other trace locations of the same memory register are used by the calculate process Data stored in these locations may be destroyed For example a CALculate1 process that stores the result in M1 2 may also destroy the contents of M1 1 M1 3 and M1 4 The result of a CALCulate function that is stored in a trace memory can be read into the controller by using the TRACe query Example Send TRACe M
158. cific hold off time which can be programmed using the TRIGger HOLDoff command During the hold off time the event detector is inhibited from acting on any trigger Trigger Type The TRIGger TYPE command selects the type of triggering which can be programmed to EDGE triggering normal trigger mode VIDeo triggering refer to section 3 4 1 2 Video triggering LOGic or GLITch triggering After a RST command the trigger type is EDGE Note Logic state pattern or glitch settings cannot be programmed using SCPI commands Trigger Source TRIGger SOURce command selects the source for the trigger event The receipt of the GPIB interface message GET Group Execute Trigger or the common command TRG serves as the trigger event when BUS is selected as trigger source The trigger event is determined by the AC line voltage when LINE is selected and is derived from the input signal when INTernal is programmed as trigger source For the 2 channel CombiScope instruments EXTernal can be programmed as the trigger source In that case channel 4 is selected as external trigger input A numeric suffix is used to specify the channel number For example TRIGger SOURce INT2 selects the signal at input channel 2 to trigger the acquisition When IMMediate is selected an acquisition does not wait for a trigger event So an INITiate command causes the acquisition to begin immediately After a RST command the trigger source is IMMediate wh
159. cified 3 is returned If MAXimum was specified 129 is returned Query form CALCulate lt n gt DERivative STATe Response 0 1 0 Differentiate function turned off 1 Differentiate function turned on Description CALC lt n gt DER POIN command specifies the width of the differentiate window The width of the differentiate window can be an odd number of points varying from 3 points to 129 points in increments of 2 points The differentiate window can be turned on with the CALCulate DERivative STATe command CALC lt n gt DER STAT command switches the differentiate function on or off The result of the differentiate function is stored in M1 n for CALCulate1 and in M2 n for CALCulate2 dependent on the input source CHn or Mi n 1 2 3 4 After a RST command the differentiate window width is 5 points and the differentiate function is turned off Example Send gt CALCulate DERivative POINts 21 width becomes 21 points Send CALCulate DERivative STATe ON Switches the differentiate function on Front panel compliance The CALCulate1 and CALCulate2 commands use the MATH1 and MATH2 features of the CombiScope instrument COMMAND REFERENCE 4 33 CALCulate lt n gt FEED Syntax CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt trace_name gt Note The parameter lt trace_name gt is string data Therefore it may be specified between single quotes as well i e trace gt n 1112
160. ct PROGRAM EXAMPLE Select HF reject triggering TRIGger FILTer HPASs STATe ON Sets High P ass filter on this selects MTB trigger HF reject 3 4 1 2 Video triggering TV video triggering enables stable triggering on video frames and lines from various TV standards without adjusting the trigger level and can be selected by programming TRIGger TYPE VIDeo Video triggering can be programmed on signals with a positive or negative signal polarity using the TRIGger VIDeo SSIGnal command 3 24 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS The video trigger mode can be programmed to field1 field2 or lines using the TRIGger VIDeo FIELd commands The video trigger line can be programmed using the TRIGger VIDeo LINE command The video system can be selected using the TRIGger VIDeo FORMat commands The following standard video systems are supported NTSC 525 lines per frame PAL 625 lines per frame SECAM 625lines per frame HDTV 1050 1125 1250 lines per frame 1 Select video triggering and video standard Examples TRIGger TYPE VIDeo Selects TV video triggering TRIGger VIDeo FORMat TYPE SECAM Selects the SECAM standard with 625 lines per frame TRIGger VIDeo FORMat LPFRame 1125 Selects the HDTV standard with 1125 lines per frame 2 Select video lines triggering and program the line to trigger on Examples TRIGger VIDeo FIELd SELect ALL Selects the video ines trigger mode TRIGger VIDeo LI
161. cular measure function by the CONFigure command the same measure function key words can be repeated by the READ query header Moreover it is allowed to request for another signal characteristic by specifying a measure function other than that for which the instrument was configured However keep in mind that the instrument was set up by CONFigure for another task As these settings are not affected by READ it is not guaranteed that the instrument is able to acquire the signal characteristic that is requested by READ Example CONFigure AC Sets up the instrument to perform an RMS measurement of the AC component 3 14 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS READ Requests to execute the default DC measurement Since this is not possible with the chosen configuration an execution error is generated and no result is returned CONFigure RISE TIME Configures the CombiScope instrument to perform a rise time measurement READ RISE OVERshoot Requests to read the rise time overshoot Because the CombiScope instrument is able to calculate the rise overshoot value when it is set up for a rise time measurement the desired result is calculated and returned A READ also allows the same parameter sets as the corresponding CONFigure instructions But these sets only serve to specify the desired result They are ignored as far as they affect instrument settings The parameters can be sent for compatibility with the preceding CONFigure command
162. d NTSC NTSC standard 525 lines frame selected HDTV HDTV standard 1050 1125 1250 lines frame selected Description The TRIGger VIDeo FORMat TYPE command selects the standard video system The TRIGger VIDeo FORMat LPFRame command does the same by specifying the number of video lines which also results in the selection of a video standard The number specified is rounded as follows 0 575 gt 525 NTSC 576 837 gt 625 PAL SECAM PAL is default 838 1087 1050 HDTV 1088 1187 gt 1125 HDTV gt 1118 1250 HDTV After a RST command lines triggering ALL and field number 1 are selected COMMAND REFERENCE 4 131 Example Send TRIGger Send TRIGger Send TRIGger Send TRIGger Send TRIGger Send TRIGger VIDeo VIDeo VIDeo VIDeo VIDeo VIDeo Front panel compliance FO FO FO FO FO FO p p p NTSC PAL SECAM PFRame 1050 PFRame 1125 PFRame 1250 Selects NTSC 525 lines frame Selects PAL 625 lines frame Selects SECAM 625 lines frame Selects HDTV 1050 lines frame Selects HDTV 1125 lines frame Selects HDTV 1250 lines frame The TRIGger VIDeo FORMat commands are the remote equivalent of the front panel TRIGGER MAIN TB VIDEO SYSTEM hdtv ntsc pal secam softkey menu 4 132 COMMAND REFERENCE TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo LINE TRIGger STARt VIDeo
163. d to the vertical sensitivity to keep the signal display on the screen e the remote state the front panel keys will have no effect on programmed settings Local front panel control can be obtained by pressing the LOCAL key provided the instrument is not programmed Locally Locked Out LLO After power on the oscilloscope is in its local state i e controlled via the front panel e All commands and queries are sequential commands except the INITiate INITiate CONTinuous and CALibration command overlapped commands Note Overlapped commands are commands that can be executed in overlap with other commands Sequential commands are commands that are completed first before a next command is executed COMMAND REFERENCE 4 15 CAL CALibration Syntax CAL Response 0 1 0 Calibration okay 1 Calibration not okay Description This query performs an automatic internal self calibration and reports the result of that calibration No external means or operator interface is needed The response indicates whether or not the instrument completed the self calibration without error A response of 0 indicates that the calibration executed successfully A response of 1 indicates that the calibration was not successful A possible calibration error is also reported via bit 8 in the QUEStionable status If bit 8 0 the calibration was successful If bit 8 1 the calibration went wrong The CAL query is the equivalent of the CALi
164. data After a RST command the hold off value is O 96 Example Send TRIGger HOLDoff 0 5 Hold off becomes 50 96 Front panel compliance The TRIGger HOLDoff command is the remote equivalent of the front panel HOLD OFF knob 4 120 COMMAND REFERENCE TRIGger SEQuence 1 LEVel TRIGger SEQuence 1 LEVel AUTO TRIGger STARt LEVel TRIGger STARt LEVel AUTO Syntax TRIGger SEQuence 1 LEVel lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger SEQuence 1 LEVel AUTO lt Boolean gt Alias TRIGger STARt LEVel lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger STARt LEVel AUTO Boolean lt NRf gt The trigger level expressed in volts MINimum Selects the minimum possible trigger level MAXimum Selects the maximum possible trigger level Query form TRiGger SEQuence 1 LEVel MINimum MAXimum Alias TRIGger STARt LEVel MAXimum Response NR3 lt NR3 gt The trigger level in volts Query form TRIGger SEQuence 1 LEVel AUTO Alias TRIGger STARt LEVel AUTO Response 0 1 0 Level peak peak off 1 Level peak peak on Description The TRIGger LEVel command controls the trigger level The trigger level for the trigger source is effective only if the trigger source is INTernal 1 2 3 or 4 The instrument function level pp is automatically switched off If the trigger source is LINE execution error 221 Settings conflict is generated at receipt of the command Execution error 221 is also gen
165. ding this data back as a parameter with the SYSTem SET command reprograms the oscilloscope to the same settings Example for the complete instrument settings Send SYSTem SET Queries the oscilloscope for the complete instrument setup Read lt block data Reads the block data response which contains the requested instrument setup from the oscilloscope Send SYSTem SET block data Sends the previously read instrument setup back to the oscilloscope in the same block data format USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 7 Example for the instrument cursor settings Send gt SYSTem SET 32 Queries the oscilloscope for the instrument settings of node 32 which are the cursor settings Read lt settings Reads the cursor settings Send SYSTem SET settings Restores the cursor settings 3 2 4 Front panel simulation This concept allows you to send commands that simulate the pressing of a front panel key This method allows the remote operation to precisely match a front panel setup In particular this method can be used to access instrument functions that cannot be programmed directly by remote commands As described in the beginning of this section there is a difference between the front panel operation and the remote control of an instrument If you use the front panel simulation commands via the remote interface be aware that no use can be made of the additional information that is presented on
166. e 3 31 3 56 3 57 4 110 Trace sample 5 2 6 Trace sample index 3 53 Trace sample value 3 50 Trace value bee rere Ru Aces Y are lt 3 31 E EOE 4 99 Tigger sei ie See XU Y qu 3 20 4 23 4 28 4 60 Trigger controls 3 552 Reus Beta G nate aly bids 3 16 Trigger coupling 3 21 B 26 Trigger delay ecce ete dua a c EUR 4 80 sue iR KR ek e RI Ren 3 21 B 26 Trigger Level Ar erre xA EDAD 3 20 Trigger 3 20 4 89 4 120 B 26 Trigger 3 18 3 37 css ier eme GE EUR a eR eR ER 3 25 Trigger nolse 3 81 Trigger Slope i e mmt pce Rr G I E S ined 3 21 Trigger 3 20 4 122 4 124 B 26 Trigger isystems c sese dr sca eS aeterne rn 4 31 4 60 4 61 B 26 AD Mae Dae aste uctus te t Pa pee ye Ue e Ute Dupont atrio c Hie 4 126 1 12 INDEX 5 Roe eae READS 3 23 4 130 TA IOON
167. e lt j gt 3 and lt gt 4 not for PM33x0B The other syntax elements are specified with the MEASure query NR3 Example lt 1 25E 01 gt 0 125 COMMAND REFERENCE 4 55 Description The FETCh queries are part of the measurement instruction set They return the signal characteristic from the last initiated measurement as specified by the measure function part of the query header An initiate command must precede a FETCh query The initiate command may be given either explicitly as INITiate IMMediate command or explicitly by a READ or MEASure query When the acquisition is still in progress the response to a FETCh query does not become available until the acquisition is completed In such a case no error is reported Execution of INITiate IMMediate and FETCh is equivalent to the execution of the READ query A FETCh query may also return a signal characteristic from a valid acquisition result that is stored in a TRACe memory element Example Send FETCh AC 2 3 Fetches RMS of the M2 trace A FETCh query allows the same parameter sets as the corresponding MEASure and CONFigure instructions Their use distinguishes from these instructions in that they only serve to specify the desired result from a FETCh query They don t affect the instrument settings They may also be sent for reasons of compatibility with a preceding CONFigure or READ instruction When the measure function par
168. e lt NR1 gt If MINimum was specified the lowest possible value is returned If MAXimum was specified the highest possible value is returned Description The SYSTem DATE command programs the date of the instrument by specifying the year month and day The date values are rounded to the nearest integer value The year parameter consists of a four digit number e g 1994 The current date is not changed after a RST command Example Send SYSTem DATE 1996 11 7 Sets the system date to Nov 7 1996 Send SYSTem DATE MAX MAX MAX Queries for the max values possible Read 2091 12 31 Reads December 31 of the year 2091 Front panel compliance The SYSTem DATE command is the remote equivalent of the UTILITY CLOCK yy mm dd softkey menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 101 SYSTem ERRor Syntax SYSTem ERRor Response lt error_number gt lt error_description gt lt error_number gt A predefined number If 0 zero is returned there are no errors in the queue lt error_description gt A short description of the error When there are no errors in the queue the description is No error Description The SYSTem ERRor query reports the next event from the error event queue and removes this event from the queue The error queue is a First In First Out FIFO queue Therefore the error query returns the oldest error Once an error is read it is removed from the queue and the next error message i
169. e IEEE 488 2 SCPI option is installed If lt option gt EXT 0 0 the EXTernal trigger option is installed If lt option gt EM 0 0 Extended Memory is available If lt option gt MP 0 0 the Math Plus option is installed Example Send Read IEEE 0 0 MP 0 0 The IEEE and MathPlus option are available Front panel compliance The OPT query is the remote equivalent of the Maintenance option of the UTILITY menu 4 22 COMMAND REFERENCE RCL Recall instrument setup Syntax numeric data Description The RCL command restores instrument settings from one of the internal memory registers 0 10 The settings in memory register 0 are standard settings which can only be recalled The settings in the memory registers 1 through 10 are programmable by sending the SAV command After power on the current settings just before power off are restored These current settings are saved in non volatile memory battery backed up Example Send SAV 2 Stores the actual instrument settings into memory register 2 Send RCL 2 Restores the instrument settings from memory register 2 Front panel compliance The SAV RCL commands are the remote equivalent of the front panel softkey operation via the SETUPS RECALL menu The standard settings stored in memory 0 can be changed via the front panel FRONT SETUPS menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 23 RST Reset Syntax RST
170. e function AMP Litude DC Specifies the input channel number at which the characteristic is to be measured Note 23 and 4 not applicable for measure parameters No parameters Measures the RMS value of the AC component The RMS value is expressed in volts No parameters Measures the amplitude of a waveform The amplitude is the difference between the HIGH and LOW values as shown in figure 3 2 The amplitude is expressed in volts No parameters Measures the DC component The DC component is expressed in volts 4 68 COMMAND REFERENCE FALL OVERshoot FALL P RES hoot FALL TIME FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum No parameters Measures the overshoot of the first falling edge of a waveform expressed as a percentage of the waveform AMPLitude The fall overshoot is the difference between the LOW value and the MINimum negative peak value to which the signal initially falls as shown in figure 3 2 The overshoot value in volts is calculated as follows overshoot value overshoot percentage AMPLitude 100 No parameters Measures the preshoot of the first falling edge of a waveform expressed as a percentage of the waveform AMPLitude The fall preshoot is the difference between the HIGH value and the MAXimum positive peak value to which the signal initially rises as shown in figure 3 2 The preshoot value in volts is calculated as follows preshoot value presho
171. e hardcopy device selection is HPGL Example Send RST Resets the instrument Send HCOPy DEVice PM8277 Selects the PM8277 plotter Send HCOPy DATA Requests for screen hardcopy data in 8277 plot format Read lt data block Reads the hardcopy data block consisting of amp O hardcopy data NL Send hardcopy data to the connected PM8277 plotter Front panel compliance The HCOPy DEVice command is the remote equivalent of the front panel UTILITY PRINT PLOT softkey menu 4 60 COMMAND REFERENCE INITiate CONTinuous Syntax INITiate CONTinuous lt Boolean gt Query form INITiate CONTinuous Response 1 0 1 Continuous automatic initiation is ON 0 Continuous automatic initiation is OFF Description The INITiate CONTinuous command selects whether the trigger system is continuously initiated or not When INITiate CONTinuous is ON the trigger system is continuously initiating acquisitions This can only be stopped by setting INITiate CONTinuous to OFF or by sending RST The ABORt command stops the current acquisition but doesn t affect the setting of INITiate CONTinuous Therefore new acquisitions are initiated immediately After a RST command INITiate CONTinuous OFF is valid PROGRAMMING NOTES e During INITiate CONTinuous ON the trigger system remains initiated does not return to the IDLE state This implies that when an command is given bit 0 OPC in the standard Event S
172. e is active This is also returned when MINimum is specified Query form INSTrument SELect Response DIG ANAL DIG The digital mode ANALOG key is active ANAL The analog mode is active Description Selects the analog or digital mode of the CombiScope by specifying a predefined number or name When one mode is selected the other mode is deactivated After a RST command the digital mode ANALOG key is selected Example Send INSTrument NSELect 2 Analog mode is selected Send INSTrument DIGital Digital mode is selected Front panel compliance These commands are the remote equivalent of the front panel ANALOG key COMMAND REFERENCE 4 67 MEASure Syntax MEASure VOLTage measure function voltage parameters measure parameters channel list voltage parameters expected voltage lt resolution gt expected voltage NRf DEFault Specifies the voltage that is expected at the input resolution lt NRf gt DEFault This parameter may be added for reasons of compatibility with similar programs for other instruments It would specify the resolution of the result when a voltage measurement is to be executed Because the CombiScope has a fixed resolution this parameter is ignored during execution Both voltage parameters must be omitted when the VOLTage node of the command is defaulted channel list 1 82 G3 G4 measur
173. e program message is not executed until the calibration process is completed Until then no response to the next query is obtained 4 42 COMMAND REFERENCE Example Send RST Resets the instrument Send gt CALibration Starts auto calibration Send STATus OPERation CONDition Requests for oper conditions Read lt cond reg Reads condition register WHILE bit 0 of cond reg 1 Loops while calibration busy Send STATus OPERation CONDition Requests for oper conditions Read cond reg Reads condition register LOOP WHILE Send STATus QUEStionable CONDition Requests for questionable conditions Read lt cond reg Reads condition register IF bit 8 of cond reg 0 THEN Calibration Okay ELSE bit 8 of cond reg 1 Calibration Not okay END IF Front panel compliance The CALibration command query is the remote equivalent of the front panel CAL key COMMAND REFERENCE 4 48 CONFigure Syntax CONFigure VOLTage measure function voltage parameters measure parameters lt channel_list gt The syntax elements are specified with the MEASure query Description The CONFigure command is part of the measurement instruction set It sets up the instrument in order to perform the measurement as specified by the lt measure_function gt part in the command header The CONFigure command does not start the acquisiti
174. ecuted when the actions of the first initiation have been completed Note OPC query also be used to achieve sequential execution of the first and the second INITiation COMMAND REFERENCE 4 31 ABORt Syntax ABORt Description The ABORt command resets the trigger system and places it in the IDLE state Pending actions that were already started are finished immediately The ABORt command is not finished until the pending actions have been terminated Note commands RST and ABORt have the same effect on the trigger functions except that ABORt does not affect the state of the INITiate CONTinuous command So when an ABORt command is sent while the INITiate CONTinuous is ON the trigger system will leave the IDLE state at once Example Send ABORt Aborts the current acquisition Send gt CONFigure AC Configures for AC RMS value Send gt READ AC Initiates and reads the AC RMS value Read lt the measured AC RMS value 4 32 COMMAND REFERENCE CALCulate lt n gt DERivative POINts CALCulate lt n gt DERivative STATe Syntax CALCulate lt n gt DERivative POINts lt numeric_data gt MAXimum MINimum CALCulate lt n gt DERivative STATe lt Boolean gt lt n gt 1112 numeric data 3 5 7 127 129 Alias An alias for DERivative is DIFFerential Query form CALCulate lt n gt DERivative POINts MINimum MAXimum Response 5 129 If MINimum was spe
175. ed to be measured The unit of expected period is second period resolution lt NRf gt DEFault Specifies the resolution of the period measurement to be executed The unit of period res is second Response NR3 Example lt 1 25 01 gt 0 125 4 72 COMMAND REFERENCE Limitations The oscilloscope is only able to calculate rise and fall time characteristics if the low reference and high reference parameters are limited to 1 8 division from their maximum and minimum The limit of 0 125 divisions noise level depends on the vertical sensitivity of the top to top value PTPeak of the actual signal and is calculated as follows lt low gt lt high gt If PTPeak lt 1 div limit 0 125 x 100 12 5 87 5 If PTPeak lt 2 div limit 0 125 2 x 100 6 25 93 75 If PTPeak lt 3 div limit 0 125 3 x100 4 16 95 84 If PTPeak lt 4 div limit 0 125 4 x 100 3 125 96 87 If PTPeak lt 5 div limit 0 125 5 x 100 2 5 97 5 If PTPeak lt 6 div limit 0 125 6 x 100 2 08 97 92 If PTPeak lt 7 div limit 0 125 7 x 100 1 78 98 22 If PTPeak lt 8 div limit 0 125 8 x 100 1 56 98 44 If PTPeak lt 9 div limit 0 125 9 x 100 1 38 98 62 If PTPeak lt 10 div limit 0 125 10 x 100 1 25 98 75 For frequency delay period and dutycycle calculations these limits are also applicable for the lt middle_referen
176. een is plotted on the plotter paper Application program Note The program is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPA4 BAS 10 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES A 5 Pass Fail Testing The following examples use the SYSTem SET command for storing and restoring instrument setups which can be used for non supported functions such as Pass Fail Testing Before executing one of the programs a pass fail test setup must be created by hand via the front panel including 1 Generation of a signal that must be tested 2 Creation of an envelope that must be stored in one of the memory registers e g m2 Front panel MEASURE gt PASS FAIL gt TEST envel gt etc 3 Definition of the action to be taken on a passing or failing waveforms e g save failing waveforms to e g m3 Front panel MEASURE gt PASS FAIL gt ACTION save gt etc 4 Execution of the example program s of the following subsections to save restore or run the Pass Fail test setup that you created before Section A 5 1 describes how to save the Pass Fail test setup Section A 5 2 describes how to restore the Pass Fail test setup Section A 5 3 describes how to run the Pass Fail test setup A 5 1 Saving a pass fail test setup In the following example the pass fail test setup information is saved to a file on disk The name of the file plus the memory register where the envelope is stored are requested The layout of the file on disk is as follows
177. els is returned T1 trg is returned T2 trg is returned FFT frequency in Hz is returned FFT amplitude is returned expressed in OB relative value dBm or Vrms absolute value Response lt ASCII_data gt ASCII data sequence of 7 bit ASCII characters Description Example Send DISPlay WINDow TEXT1 DATA Read pkpk 6084E 04 V Response is peak peak value of 608 4 mV MEAS1 The DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT n DATA query returns the measured data as displayed on the upper line s of the screen of your CombiScope instrument COMMAND REFERENCE 4 49 The measurement data functions must be enabled first or the error message 221 Settings conflict is generated If the oscilloscope is in the analog mode the error message 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated The following measurement data values can be selected by specifying the number n in the query NUMBER n MEASUREMENT VALUE 1 2 MEAS1 MEAS data 10 11 12 13 20 21 30 40 51 52 CURSORS data 60 61 MATH FFT frequency amplitude MEAS1 and MEAS2 data measurement functions can only be selected and enabled via the front panel MEASURE key and softkey menu CURSORS data measurement functions can only be selected and enabled via the front panel CURSORS key and softkey menu MATH FFT data measurement functions can be selected and enabled via the front panel MATH CURSORS keys and softkey me
178. en only LO mode After a RST command the option HPGL is selected Example Prepare for hardcopy to a HPGL plotter Send RST Selects HPGL plotter Send HCOPy DATA Queries for screen hardcopy data Read data block Reads the hardcopy data block data block lt data NL Send hardcopy data Sends the hardcopy data block to the connected HPGL plotter Note The preamble 0 for indefinite length block data at the beginning of the data block must not be sent Front panel compliance The HCOPy DATA query is the remote equivalent of the PLOT key on the front panel COMMAND REFERENCE 4 59 HCOPy DEVice Syntax HCOPy DEVice HPGL 7440 HP7550 HP7475A HP7470A PM8277 PM8278 FX80 LQ1500 HP2225 HPLASER HP540 DUMP M1 HPGL HPGL plot data format HP7440 HP7550 HP7475A HP7470A Plotters 8277 PM8278 FX80 2225 LQ1500 HPLASER HP540 Printers DUMP M1 Trace dump data format to one of the arbitrary waveform generators 5138 5139 or 5150 Query form HCOPy DEVice Response HPGL HP7440 HP7550 HP7475A HP7470A PM8277 8278 FX80 LQ1500 HP2225 HPLASER HP540 DUMP M1 Description The HCOPy DEVice n command selects a hardcopy device by specifying the device type This selection determines the format of the hardcopy data that can be read using the HCOPy DATA query After a RST command th
179. end SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe VOLTage2 Switches channel 2 on Send TRACe COPY M1 1 CH1 The result is that the trace memories of channel 1 and 2 copied to M1 1 and M1 2 respectively Front panel compliance The TRACe COPY command is the remote equivalent of the front panel COPY option of the SAVE menu 4 110 COMMAND REFERENCE TRACe DATA Syntax TRACe DATA destination trace lt NRf gt definite block Alias DATA DATA destination trace lt NRf gt definite block destination trace Mi n n 1 4 i21 8 standard memory i21 50 extended memory lt NRf gt Constant value Range from 128 to 127 1 byte trace points Range from 32768 to 32767 2 byte trace points lt definite_block gt The format of the block data is as follows nx xfb b s NL NewLine code checksum over all trace bytes trace sample data bytes trace data format byte number of trace bytes fbb bbs number of digits of x x Notes 8 decimal each trace sample is one byte 8 bits If f 16 decimal each trace sample is two bytes 16 bits i e most significant byte msb least significant byte Isb The checksum is done over all trace sample data bytes by adding the bytes by one as follows SUM SUM byte N MOD256 Query form TRACe DATA source trace source trace CHn Mi n n 1 4 i21 8 standard memory 1 50 extended memory
180. end of the measurement is waited for Then as an example the dT cursor readout value is read and printed 4 Finally the program asks to stop or to perform a next measurement Application summary e Before running the program make a cursor measurement setup via the front panel CURSORS key and menu e Enable the SRQ mechanism to generate an interrupt after Operation Completed routine ServReq is executed e Request to save the current instrument setup If response Y es routine Save Setup is called e Request to read an instrument setup If response Y es routine Enter Setup is called e Repeat testt Initiate a single acquisition by sending INITiate CONTinuous OFF INITiate OPC 8 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES e f an SRQ is generated acquisition finished the dT cursor value is read and printed by sending DISPlay WINDow TEXT20 DATA Request to stop or to repeat this test do Repeat test1 again e Routine ServReq does the following Serial polls the status byte to reset the SRQ mechanism Reads the ESR byte to clear the OPC bit Sets the SRQ detected flag to signal that an SRQ interrupt occurred e Routine Enter Setup does the following Requests for a path directory file name Inputs the instrument settings lt setupout gt from the file specified Sends the SYSTem SET lt setupout gt command to restore the instrument setup e Routine Save Setup does the following Requests for a path direc
181. enerates continuous sweeps ON IMMediate independent of any trigger settings gt gt gt Normal trig lt lt lt INTernal lt n gt Generates continuous sweeps triggered ON or using trigger settings LINE gt gt gt Normal trig lt lt lt Generates continuous sweeps externally ON EXTernal triggered via channel 4 only for PM33x0B gt gt gt Single Shot lt lt lt ON Generates one sweep triggered by TRG or BUS or GET regardless of any trigger settings OFF Table 3 1 TRIGger modes 3 26 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS Only in the single shot and multiple shot trigger mode INITiate CONTinuous OFF the bits 3 SWEeping and 5 Waiting for TRIGger in the OPERation status are valid Also the Operation Complete bit OPC bit 0 in the standard Event Status Register ESR is valid This allows you to detect whether the instrument is armed initiated triggered busy with acquisition or finished with the last acquisition i e ready for the next acquisition SINGLE SHOT MODE TB MODE single Commands CONFigure AC Configures instrument and sets single shot mode OPERATION STATUS BITS bit 5 bit3 STATE DESCRIPTION Waitfor TRIG SWEeping OPC idle state after RST 0 0 0 Wait for trigger state INIT received 1 0 0 armed Wait for complete triggered 1 0 0 or busy Finished with acquisition 0 0 1 ready MULTIPLE SHOT MODE MODE multi OPERATION STA
182. er level to e g 0 1 volts PREPARATIONS e Connect probe to channel 1 After start up of the program you will be asked to trigger the acquisition with the open end of the probe i e touch the probe or strike the probe on the table PROGRAM EXAMPLE ok ck ek Acquire a single shot trace okk ke ke DIM tracebuf AS STRING x 16500 CALL Send 0 8 FORMat INTeger 8 1 Formats 8 bits sample CALL Send 0 8 TRACe POINts CH1 8192 1 Formats 8192 sample points CALL Send 0 8 TRIGger SOURce 11 1 Trigger source channel 1 CALL Send 0 8 TRIGger LEVel 0 1 1 Trigger level 0 1 CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 Single shot initiation PRINT Trigger the CombiScope instrument by touching the probe tip PRINT gt gt gt Press any key when finished WHILE INKEYS WEND CALL Send 0 8 WAI 1 Waits for previous commands to finish CALL Send 0 8 TRACe 1 1 Queries for channel 1 trace CALL Receive 0 8 tracebuf 256 Reads channel 1 trace contents ofthe tracebuf string is as follows 4 8194 8 byte 1 gt byte 8192 sum 10 nr of digits VAL MID tracebuf 2 1 nr of bytes VAL MID tracebuf 3 nr of digits 2 sample length ASC MID tracebuf 3 nr of digits 1 8 nr of samples nr of bytes sample length PRINT Number of bytes received IBCNT 2 number of bytes PRINT Number of trace sample
183. erated if the instrument cannot report the unit in volts upon receipt of the query The TRIGger LEVel AUTO switches the level peak peak function on or off If level peak peak is switched off the trigger level is automatically reactivated If level peak peak is switched on the trigger level is automatically deactivated and the level range is clamped within the peaks of the signal COMMAND REFERENCE 4 121 After a RST command the trigger level is MAXimum and auto level peak peak is switched off Notice that there exists a coupling between programming the attenuator vertical sensitivity and the trigger level If the attenuator is changed the trigger level is also adapted to keep the signal display on the screen Programming tip First program the attenuator SENSe VOLTage RANGe PTPeak and then the trigger level TRIGger LEVel Example Send RST Resets the instrument Send TRIGger SOURce INTernall Trigger source becomes channel 1 Send INITiate CONTinuous Continuous initiation Send SENSe VOLTage RANGe PTPeak 8 1 V div sensitivity Send TRIGger LEVel 0 2 Trigger level becomes 0 2 V Level peak peak is also switched off Send TRIGger LEVel AUTO ON Switches level peak peak on and deactivates the trigger level Front panel compliance The TRIGger LEVel command is the remote equivalent of the front panel TRIGGER LEVEL knob The TRIGger LEVel AUTO command is the remote e
184. es that the characteristic to be measured relates to a voltage signal For example the AC component of a voltage signal the rise time of a voltage signal etc Restrictions A MEASure query may be executed only when the oscilloscope is in the digital mode INStrument SELect DlGital The digital mode is selected after RST Executing this query when the instrument is in analog mode generates execution error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required Example 1 Send gt MEASure VOLTage AC 0 6 82 Measures AC RMS on channel 2 expected voltage 600 mV Read lt the measured AC RMS value Example 2 Send MEASure VOLTage RISE TIME 0 6 20 80 1E 2 02 Measures the rise time xpected voltage 600 mV LOW ref 20 HIGH ref 80 xpected time 0 01 seconds channel 2 Read the measured rise time Errors When TRIGger SOURce BUS is selected the execution of a MEASure query generates execution error 214 Trigger deadlock 4 74 COMMAND REFERENCE READ Syntax READ VOLTage measure function voltage parameters measure parameters channel list The syntax elements are specified with the MEASure query Response NR3 Example lt 1 25 01 gt 0 125 Description The READ queries are part of the measurement instruction set They start a measurement and return the signal characteristic that is specified by the
185. es to memory for a description about how to copy traces As response to the TRACe query the data is returned as block data Section 3 4 3 Conversion of trace data specifies the coding of this data and describes how to convert this data into voltage values 3 30 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 42 1 Single shot acquisition PROGRAM EXAMPLE In this example a single shot trace acquisition is done via channel 1 The trace bytes are entered as characters in the string response DIM response AS STRING 1033 Dimensions trace buffer CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Resets the instrument Trigger source becomes IMMediate Number of trace samples becomes 512 Number of trace sample bits becomes 16 CALL Send 0 8 CONFigure AC 1 Configures for optimal AC RMS settings CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 nitiates single acquisition CALL Send 0 8 WAI TRACe CH1 1 Requests for channel 1 trace data Notice WAI before TRACe The WAI command takes care that the TRACe CH1 command is executed when the INITiate command is finished CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the channel 1 trace data 3 422 Repetitive acquisitions PROGRAM EXAMPLE In this example 10 trace acquisitions are done via channel 1 The trace bytes are entered as characters in the string response The 10 trace buffers are written to the file TRACE10 on the hard disk Triggering is done via the GPIB by sending the TRG com
186. esolution at 8 bits Send TRACe M1 4 Queries for trace 4 in memory register 1 Read trace block Each trace point consists of 8 bits Note This only works when a trace was stored before in M1 4 4 58 COMMAND REFERENCE HCOPy DATA Syntax HCOPy DATA Response indefinite block Description This query returns a data block of indefinite length containing a hardcopy of the picture on the oscilloscope display according to the current printer plotter selections These selections can be made through the UTIL PRINT amp PLOT Softkey menu options The received data block can be sent to a supported plotter or printer via the IEEE bus or the EIA 232 D RS 232 C interface to get the hardcopy If the oscilloscope is in the analog mode error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated Refer to the HCOPy DEVice command for a list of supported printers and plotters of which two special selection possibilities HPGL If this is selected a plotter independent HPGL data block is sent which can be used for instance in a Desk Top Publishing application DUMP M1 This selects a special trace dump to be used in combination with one of the generators PM5138 PM5139 or PM5150 connected to the CombiScope via GPIB This option can only be started by pressing the PLOT key on the front panel not by sending the HCOPy DATA query Also the controller must be disconnected from the GPIB and the generator must be in its list
187. esponse lt NR3 gt NR3 The sweep time expressed in seconds If MINimum was specified the minimum possible value is returned If MAXimum was specified the maximum possible value is returned Description This command sets the time base of a sweep for all input channels in seconds The time base of a sweep is the time duration of one complete trace acquisition Together with the number of trace points TRACe POINts the SENSe SWEep TIME command determines the Main Time Base MTB MTB is expressed in seconds per division Since there are 50 points in each division horizontally the MTB can be calculated from the following equation MTB 50 SENSe SWEep TIME TRACe POINts 1 In the analog mode the main time base is put in the variable mode In the digital mode the sweep times are limited by permitted MTB values according to the following table 5 ms us ns 500 500 500 250 200 200 200 200 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 not valid 20 20 20 20 in the real 10 10 10 10 time mode 5 5 5 5 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 Note If 2or more channels are switched on in the real time mode the time base range is limited to 10 us non alternating time base Table 4 2 values in the digital mode 4 84 COMMAND REFERENCE Limitations e MTB value of 2 ns is only possible for the PM339xB CombiScope instruments e SENSe SWEep REALtime is ON the MTB range is from 200 seconds to 250 nanoseconds and sequential s
188. ets the date in years months and days PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem TIME 14 25 36 1 Setsthetime to 25 minutes and 36 seconds past 2 o clock in the afternoon CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem DATE 1993 12 15 1 Setsthe date to 15 december 1993 3 14 Auto Calibration Calibration is only possible when the CombiScope instrument is warmed up The instrument data is calibrated automatically by sending the CAL or the CALibration query The internal calibration lasts several minutes A 0 result is returned after correct calibration and a 1 result is returned when the calibration failed Notice that the response to the calibration query is only returned when the calibration has completed During the calibration process bit 0 Calibrating is set in the operation status condition register This bit cannot be read during the execution of the CAL or CALibration query because these queries are sequential commands This bit can be read after sending the CALibration command which is an overlapped command The completion of the CALibration command is reported in the standard Event Status Register ESR bit 0 OPC bit set to 1 When the calibration is finished bit 8 in the QUEStionable status reports a possible calibration error if set to 1 Note X Execute calibration only when it is needed e g when a message on the screen of your CombiScope instrument requests to do so USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 69 PROGRAM E
189. examples can be executed one at a time or chained together for a complete tutorial The program examples are based on the system and programming environment as described below Note All PROGRAM EXAMPLE s in this chapter are supplied on floppy under the file name EXGETSTA BAS They are chained together in order of appearance 2 1 1 System setup e CombiScope instrument contains a factory installed IEEE option e APC is used as controller In the PC an IEEE 488 2 interface GPIB board must be installed to turn the PC into a GPIB controller The GPIB controller must be connected to the CombiScope instrument via an IEEE cable Note The program examples throughout this manual have been executed on an IBM compatible PC with the GPIB interface board and software of the product PM2201 03 installed The PM2201 board is equivalent to the PCIIA board from National Instruments 2 1 2 Programming environment e MS QuickBASIC is used as the programming language e Anumber of standard IEEE 488 2 drivers are used to control the CombiScope instrument via the GPIB These drivers must be included in the application program Therefore the first statement of an application program must be as follows REM INCLUDE path QBDECL BAS Note The program examples throughout this manual have been executed using the IEEE 488 2 drivers and the device handler GPIB COM of the product PM2201 03 2 2 GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING The para
190. eys n 1 6 SYSTem KEY 201 SYSTem KEY 104 DISPlay MENU UTIL SYSTem KEY n REMOTE CONTROL RS 232 key STATUS LOCAL key UTILIT menu UTILITY REMOTE SETUP softkeysn 1 6 RS 232 SETUP lt SYSTem KEY 201 SYSTem KEY 104 DISPlay MENU UTIL SYSTem KEY n SYSTem COMMunicate S ERial RUN STOP key RUN STOP SYSTem KEY 309 INITiate CONTinuous ON OFF SCREEN CONTROLS AND GRATICULE knob TRACE INTENSITY DISPlay BRIGhtness knob TEXT INTENSITY none knob TRACE ROTATION none knob FOCUS none knob GRATICULE ILLUMINATION none SCREEN MESSAGES none SETUPS key SETUPS menu FRONT SETUPS softkeys n 1 6 SYSTem KEY 103 DISPlay MENU SETups SYSTem KEY n recall xRCL Save xSAV SETUPS SEQUENCE key STATUS SYSTem KEY 201 key TEXT OFF SYSTem KEY 801 menu UTILITY DISPlay MENU UTIL softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY n 24 CROSS REFERENCES FUNCTION KEYS MENUS STANDARD FRONT FRONT PANEL RESET key SETUPS menu FRONT SETUPS softkeys n 1 6 RELATED SCPI COMMAND S SYSTem SET RST SYSTem KEY 103 DISPlay MENU SETups SYSTem KEY n recall Save xSAV Status handling CLS xESR xSRE xSTB STATus OP ERation EVENt STATus OP ERation C ONDition STATus OP ERation E NABle STATus OP ERation P TR ansition STATus OP ERation NTRansition STATus QUEStionable E VENtI STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable E NABle S S S S S
191. f front panel simulation commands must be restricted to special applications or front panel functions that are not supported by SCPI commands Bear in mind the differences between different instruments from the same family as described in the beginning of this chapter It is possible to simulate the pressing of a key on the front panel by using the SYSTem KEY command It is also possible to detect whether or not a key has been pressed This is done via bit 6 of the Event Status Register ESR query The last key pressed can be queried by using the SYSTem KEY query Furthermore it is better to use the DISPlay MENU command to switch a softkey menu ON or OFF The pressing of a softkey can be simulated with the SYSTem KEY 1 to 6 command Since the role of each softkey is determined by a previously selected menu this will be a tedious and cumbersome process Still it might be of interest for simple applications Example The command sequence RST DISPlay MENU ACQuire SYSTem KEY 2 resets the instrument e g digital mode on and peak detection off switches the softkey menu ACQUIRE on and simulates the pressing of softkey 2 which causes peak detection to be switched on 3 17 1 How to simulate the pressing of a front panel key The SYSTem KEY commands allow you to simulate the pressing of a front panel key The front panel key numbering not the rotary knobs is roughly divided into the following matrix of rows and columns
192. form SENSe AVERage STATe Response 0 1 0 AVERAGE function switched off 1 AVERAGE function switched on Description Switches the preprocessing AVERAGE function on or off If switched on measurement values and acquisition traces are averaged according to the average count factor SENSe AVERage COUnt Averaging is a way to suppress noise without loosing bandwidth It can only be used for repetitive signals If the oscilloscope is in the analog mode error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated After a RST command the AVERAGE function is switched off Example Send RST Resets the instrument Trigger source to IMMediate Send CONFigure AC Configures for AC RMS Send TRIGger INTernal 1 Makes channel 1 the trigger source Send gt SENSe AVERage COUNt 16 Average count factor becomes 16 Send SENSe AVERage ON Switches average function on Send READ AC Starts averaging AC RMS Read lt AC RMS voltage averaged over 16 sequential acquisitions from channel 1 gt Note For single shot averaged acquisitions the trigger source must be one of the input channels n INTernal n instead of IMMediate software automatic trigger Front panel compliance The SENSe AVERage STATe command is the remote equivalent of the front panel AVERAGE key COMMAND REFERENCE 4 77 SENSe AVERage COUNt SENSe AVERage TYPE Syntax SENSe AVERage COUNt lt NRf gt lt NRf gt 2 4 8 16
193. fset offset VAL LEFT offs IBCNT z length IF sample length 1 THEN FOR i 1 TO nr of samples byte samples trace ASC MID response 3 nr of digits 1 IF trace 127 THEN trace trace 256 END IF sample i trace 200 ptpeak offset PRINT sample i NEXT i ELSE FOR i 1 TO nr of samples 2 byte samples 2 x i 2 nr of digits Pointer to next sample bytel ASC MID response J 1 M S B byte2 ASC MID response J 1 1 L S B IF bytel 128 THEN trace bytel 256 4 byte2 ELSE trace bytel 256 256 byte2 END IF sample i trace 51200 ptpeak offset PRINT sample i NEXT i END IF 3 36 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 5 Averaging Acquisition Data Acquired traces and measured signal characteristics can be averaged over a number of acquisitions The preprocessing AVERAGE function of the CombiScopes instruments can be enabled by using the SENSe AVERage STATe command When this function is set to ON averaging is done according to the following formula AVG In the expression n specifies the number of acquisitions that is averaged This parameter can be programmed by using the SENSe AVERage COUNt command X represents the acquisition result to be averaged Example Send SENSe AVERage COUnt 16 This sets the average count factor at 16 which means 16 sequential acquisitions are averaged Send SEN
194. g process To cancel running acquisitions use the ABORt command As an example the format of the block data of a trace of 512 16 bit samples is shown trace bytes 41026 16 msb 1 lsb 1 gt msb 512 lt Isb 512 checksum NL trace sample 512 trace sample 1 byte with decimal value 16 number of trace bytes 1026 number of digits of 1026 Example 1 In this program example a trace is read from the actual signal at input channel 1 The received data block is converted to an array of voltages This program example works for traces of 512 samples consisting of 8 bits 1 byte or 16 bits 2 bytes samples Send RST Resets the instrument Send CONFigure AC 81 Configures for AC RMS Send gt INITiate Initiates single acquisition Send WAI Waits for end of acquisition 4 112 COMMAND REFERENCE Send TRACe CH1 Requests channel 1 trace Read block data Reads channel 1 trace Determine nr of samples from block data Send SENSe VOLTage RANGe PTPeak Queries peak to peak Read lt peak to peak Reads peak to peak Send gt SENSe VOLTage RANGe OFFSet Queries offset Read offset Reads offset IF sample is 1 byte THEN FOR 1 1 TO nr of samples Determine trace i value from block data IF trace i gt 127 THEN trace i trace i 256 sample i trace i 200 lt peak to peak gt offset
195. gth The coupling is one way i e the sweep time changes if the acquisition length changes Example The number of trace points is 2048 Send gt SENSe SWEep TIME 04 The sweep time becomes 40 9 ms Send gt TRACe POINts 1 1 4096 The number of trace points becomes 4096 Send SENSe SWEep TIME The response is 819E 04 which means that the sweep time was doubled to 81 9 milliseconds CAUTION If the acquisition length is programmed to a different value all acquisition and register trace memories are cleared So all previously defined traces are lost Example Send TRACe POINts CH1 8192 Number of trace points for all trace memories becomes 8192 Send TRACe M2 3 Requests M2 3 trace Read block data Reads M2 3 trace Front panel compliance The TRACe POINts command is the remote equivalent of the front panel ACQ LENGTH option of the TB MODE menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 115 TRIGger SEQuence 1 FILTer HPASs FREQuency TRIGger STARI FILTer HPASs FREQuency TRIGger SEQuence 1 FILTer HPASs STATe TRIGger STARt FILTer HPASs STATe Syntax Alias Query form Alias Response Query form Alias Response TRIGger SEQuence 1 FILTer HPASs FREQuency lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger SEQuence 1 FlLTer HPASs STATe lt Boolean gt TRIGger STARt FlLTer HPASs FREQuency lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger STARt FlLTer HPASs STATe lt Boolean gt lt
196. he presence of a signal on channel 1 2 and the external trigger input If there is a signal present on the external trigger input the EXTernal trigger channel is selected as trigger source and the external trigger view facility becomes active Limitation The amplitude of the external trigger signal must be high enough for the sensitivity of the external trigger input 0 1 or 1 V div USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 29 3 4 2 X Reading trace acquisitions Once acquisitions are completed the resulting traces ares placed in TRACe memory as shown in the following figure INPut SENSe 1 INPut 1 VOLTage 1 _ 2 INPut2 VOLTage2 K gt 3 4 INPut3 VOLTage3 4 4 INPut4 VOLTage4 Main Time Base ST7160 Figure 3 10 trace acquisition flow The last acquired trace at input channel 1 is placed in the TRACe memory element named CH1 The trace acquired at channel 2 in CH2 etc This trace data can be read by using the TRACe DATA query Example TRACe CH2 Returns the trace that was last acquired at input channel 2 When new acquisitions are executed the previously stored traces are not automatically saved but overwritten by the new result When these traces need to be saved they have to be copied into other TRACe memory elements before a new acquisition is initiated Refer to section 3 10 2 Copying trac
197. he reference level for the absolute FFT value is calculated from a peak to peak amplitude of a sine wave on a screen of 6 34 divisions This amplitude equals an RMS value of 6 34 2 2 2 24 This level is used as the reference level top of screen for the FFT amplitude display For any attenuator setting the reference level can be calculated as follows 2 24 number of millivolts per divisions Examples At 20mV div 2 24 20 44 8 mVrms At 100mV div 2 24 100 224 mVrms For 500 system a signal amplitude of 224 mVrms corresponds to the following signal power P 0 224 2 50 0 001 W 1 mW This also be expressed as a signal level of OdBm at 500 impedance The same voltage measured in 6000 system corresponds to the following power level P 0 224 600 0 0000836 W 83 6 LW This can be calculated as a signal level of 10 83 6 6 1 mW 10 log 83 6E 3 10 7 dBm Vrms offset calculation A signal of 1 mW at 50Q impedance is taken as voltage reference at 100 mV div From this signal the RMS voltage is calculated as follows Urms P R 3 50 0 2236068 For a whole screen of 10 divisions Urms 2 236068 Depending on the attenuator setting the Vrms offset voltage is calculated as follows Vrms offset attenuation Urms Example for attenuator setting 0 5 V div Vrms offset 0 5 2 236068 1 118034 3 52 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS dBm
198. ic trace range of 65535 points whereas the screen range is limited to 51200 points 3 32 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 4 8 1 Conversion of 8 bit samples to integer As an example a conversion of a trace of 512 8 bit samples is shown The format is as follows trace bytes 35 14 lt 8 gt byte 1 gt byte 512 checksum NL trace sample 512 trace sample 1 byte with decimal value 8 number of trace bytes 514 number of digits of 514 PROGRAM EXAMPLE In this example a trace acquisition of 1 byte samples is done Thereafter the trace data is read and converted to integer samples in the array trace and the number of trace bytes and trace samples is printed The conversion from single byte value to integer is done as follows refer to figure 3 12 If byte gt 128 then integer byte 256 Example byte 255 gt integer 255 256 1 DIM trace 512 Array of 512 integers DIM response AS STRING 520 Trace response buffer CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Resets the instrument CALL Send 0 8 FORMat INTeger 8 1 Data format of 8 bits samples CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 Single shot initiation CALL Send 0 8 amp WAI TRACe CH1 1 Queries for channel 1 trace CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the channel 1 trace PRINT Number of read bytes IBCNTS number of read bytes contents of the response s
199. ich means no trigger is required Trigger Level The TRIGger LEVel command allows you to set the trigger level for all input channels Programming the trigger level automatically switches off level peak peak The trigger level can be programmed only when the TRIGger SOURce is INTernal The TRIGger LEVel AUTO command allows you to switch level peak peak on or off Switching on level peak peak deactivates the trigger level After a RST command the TRIGger LEVel is set to its maximum value and level peak peak is switched off USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 21 Trigger Slope The TRIGger SLOPe command allows you to define the trigger edge for all input channels which can be POSitive NEGative or EITHer After a RST command the TRIGger SLOPe is set to POSitive PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 CONFigure PTPeak 82 1 Configures channel 2 CALL Send 0 8 SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe VOLTage2 1 Setschannel2 ON CALL Send 0 8 TRIGger SOURce INTernal2 1 Trigger source channel 2 CALL Send 0 8 TRIGger LEVel 0 2 1 Trigger level 20 2 V TRIGger LEVel command also switches level peak peak off CALL Send 0 8 TRIGger SLOPe NEGative 1 Trigger slope negative CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 Single initiation CALL Send 0 8 FETCh PTPeak 82 1 Queries for peak to peak response CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Enters peak to peak PRINT Measured peak to peak response Pri
200. igger source GPIB Send SENSe VOLTage RANGe OFFSet 25 250 millivolt offset Send gt INITiate Initiates trigger system Send gt Triggers GET via GPIB Send gt FETCh AC Fetches AC RMS value Read lt the measured AC RMS voltage Note Because the trigger source is BUS GPIB the GET Group Execute Trigger code must be sent after INITiate and before FETCh to trigger the acquisition Errors 1 When a FETCh query is executed and no valid acquisition data is available nor an acquisition pending execution error 230 Data corrupt or stale is generated In that case no result is returned as response to the FETCh query When a FETCh query for a characteristic from a TRACe memory element is received which does not contain valid acquisition data execution error 230 Data corrupt or stale is generated COMMAND REFERENCE 4 57 FORMat DATA Syntax FORMat DATA 8 16 INTeger 8 Trace point of 8 bits one byte INTeger 16 Trace point of 16 bits two bytes Query form FORMat DATA Response 8 16 8 Trace point consists of one byte INT 16 Trace point consists of two bytes Description Programs the number of bits of the trace data points If the oscilloscope is in the analog mode error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated After a RST command the number of bits is 16 Example Send FORMat INTeger 8 Programs the r
201. imum MAXimum 0 00E 00 1 00E 01 3 0E 04 If MINimum was specified the minimum possible cutoff frequency is returned i e 0 Hz If MAXimum was specified the maximum possible cutoff frequency is returned i e 30 KHz TRIGger SEQuence 1 FILTer LPASs STATe TRIGger SEQuence 1 FILTer LPASs STATe 011 0 High pass filter active HF reject 1 Low pass filter active 4 118 COMMAND REFERENCE Description The ThRIGger FILTer LPASs FREQuency command sets the MTB cutoff frequency which defines the trigger coupling The specified frequency values are rounded as follows MH uu 4 99 is rounded to 0 Hz i e DC coupling 5 4999 99 is rounded to 10 Hz 1 AC coupling 515000 is rounded to 30 KHz i e LF reject The TRIGger FILTer LPASs STATe command activates ON or deactivates OFF the MTB low pass filter Activating the MTB low pass filter automatically deactivates the MTB high pass filter Sets the high pass cutoff frequency at bandwidth 60 100 200 MHz sets the low pass cutoff frequency at 0 Hz DC coupling DeActivating the MTB low pass filter automatically activates the MTB high pass filter Sets the high pass cutoff frequency at 30 KHz sets the low pass cutoff frequency at 0 Hz After a RST command the low pass filter is ON and the cutoff frequency is 0 Hz DC coupling Note following coupling exists between programming the cutoff frequency and de activati
202. ined from the AC line voltage Triggering done by a TRG command or GET code via the GPIB COMMAND REFERENCE 4 125 Description Controls the trigger source The command selects the source and the query returns the source that triggers the acquisition If a trigger source other than IMMediate INTernal lt n gt LINE or BUS is active execution error 221 is generated at receipt of the query The dual slope selection EITHer is only possible if the trigger source is INTernal lt n gt and if in the real time mode SENSe SWEep REALtime ON If the trigger source becomes BUS LINE or IMMediate the trigger slope selection is changed to POSitive After a RST command the trigger source is IMMediate for the PM3384B 94B and EXTernal for the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments if a signal is available at the external trigger input channel Example Send CONFigure AC 81 Configures AC RMS CH1 Send TRIGger SOURce INTernall Input channel 1 becomes the trigger source Send TRIGger LEVel 0 2 Trigger level becomes 0 2V Send TRIGger SOURce BUS The GPIB becomes the trigger source Send gt INITiate Single initiation Send Triggering via the GPIB Send gt FETCh AC Fetches AC RMS values Read AC RMS voltage Reads AC RMS value Front panel compliance The TRIGger SOURce command is the remote equivalent of the front panel TRIGGER MAIN TB chn line option of the TRIGGER menu Pr
203. ing hanning or rectang MATH PARAM READOUT rel to select relative FFT MATH PARAM READOUT abs to select absolute FFT CURSORS READOUT dBm 50 dBm 6002 dBuV or Vrms V VM VM e Request the following values gt The acquisition length using the TRACe POINts CH1 query gt The sweep time to calculate the MTB using the SENSe SWEep TIME query MTB sweep_time 50 acquisition_length 1 The calculation factor to determine the sample point frequencies is determined as follows calc 1250 acquisition_length MTB 50 gt The peak to peak voltage to calculate the attenuation using the SENSe VOLTage RANGe PTPeak query Attenuation peak to peak 8 gt FFT type i e ABSolute or RELative using the CALCulate TRANsform FREQuency TYPE query e Read the FFT trace from memory register m1 1 using the TRACe M1_1 query e Convert and print the frequency and amplitude values of the FFT trace sample points according to the formulas as explained before Note The program prints the calculated values in groups of 20 sample points on the screen of your computer Note program is supplied on floppy under file name EXFFTTRC BAS USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 55 3 9 5 Histogram functions The HISTogram function calculates an amplitude distribution of the incoming trace The number of points in the histogram trace is 512 Each point in the histogram specifies the numbe
204. instruments Example 1 Display on the screen of the oscilloscope the text Remote control via PC Send DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT STATe ON Enables display of text Send DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT DATA Remote control via PC Example 2 Display on the screen of the oscilloscope the text 1 25 1 Send DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT STATe ON Enables display of text Send DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT DATA 401 25 Sends header 1 25 as text Send gt byte 25 gt Sends 25 decimal symbol as single character byte Send gt CH1 Sends space followed by CH1 Front panel compliance The DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT DATA command is the remote equivalent of the insert user text option of the front panel DISPLAY TEXT menu 4 52 COMMAND REFERENCE Table 4 1 Display character set for CombiScope instruments Notes The left value dec is the decimal value of the code and the right value sym is the oscilloscope symbol The displayed symbol for the decimal values 128 to 255 is equal to the symbol display for the decimal values 0 to 127 Example Decimal value 200 decimal value 72 200 128 symbol H For the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments the symbol dec 36 is replaced by the symbol External Trigger COMMAND REFERENCE 4 58 DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT 1 STATe Syntax DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT 1 STATe Boolean 2 Indicates that the user text field is window 2 Query f
205. is cleared The STATus QUEStionable NTRansition command sets the contents of the negative transition filter of the questionable register structure The negative transition filter specifies which bits in the questionable condition register that make a negative transition 1 gt 0 set the corresponding bit in the questionable event register For example when you set bit 2 in this filter it will set bit 2 in the questionable event register at the time bit 2 in the questionable condition register is reset changed from 1 to 0 After power on the contents of the negative transition filter is set to 0000 4 94 COMMAND REFERENCE The STATus QUEStionable PTRansition command sets the contents of the positive transition filter of the questionable register structure The positive transition filter specifies which bits in the questionable condition register that make a positive transition 0 gt 1 set the corresponding bit in the questionable event register For example when you set bit 2 in this filter it will set bit 2 in the questionable event register at the time bit 2 in the questionable condition register is set changed from 0 to 1 After power on the contents of the negative transition filter is set to H7FFF The bits have the following value and meaning BIT DECIMAL MEANING NUMBER VALUE 0 1 Digital sample value is clipped at max or min during VOLTage calculation 4 16 TEMPerature too
206. ive value causes a post trigger delay time MINimum Selects the minimum possible pre trigger view time MAXimum Selects the maximum possible post trigger delay time Query form SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME MINimum MAXimum Response lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt The trigger delay time in seconds If MINimum was specified the minimum pre trigger view time is returned If MAXimum was specified the maximum post trigger delay time is returned Description Controls the trigger delay time for the Main Time Base sweep The trigger delay time may be positive post trigger or negative pre trigger The post trigger delay time delays the data acquisition after a trigger The pre trigger view time allows for pre trigger acquisition data If the oscilloscope is in the analog mode error 221 Setting conflict Digital mode required is generated After a RST command the trigger delay is set at a pre trigger view time of 5 milliseconds 5 divisions Because the sweep time is set to 10 ms after a RST the trigger point is positioned in the middle of an acquisition Example Send RST Resets the instrument Send gt SENSe SWEep TIME 5E 3 The sweep time becomes 5 ms MTB 0 5 ms div Send SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME 0 001 pre trigger view time becomes 1 ms 2 div Send gt SENSe SWEep OFFSet TIME 0 001 The post trigger delay time becomes 1 ms 2 div Front panel compliance The SENSe SWEep
207. k gt value is considered to be at the probe tip otherwise the value is at the BNC plug The number of points with which a trace is written on the screen depends on the resolution of the trace sample points FORmat command If the resolution is 8 bits the number of points is 200 for the whole screen which implies 200 8 25 points per division If the resolution is 16 bits the number of points is 200 256 51200 for the whole screen which implies 51200 8 6400 points per division COMMAND REFERENCE 4 89 After a RST command the peak to peak value is reset as follows For channel 1 to 1 6V vertical sensitivity 200 mV div For channel 2 to 0 4V vertical sensitivity 50 mV div For channel and 4 to 8V vertical sensitivity 1 V div Note Ifa 10 1 probe is connected to a channel the peak to peak value is 10 times higher For example 80V instead of 8V Coupled values There exists a coupling between programming of the attenuator vertical sensitivity and the trigger level If the attenuator is changed the trigger level is also adapted to keep the signal display on the screen Programming tip First program the attenuator SENSe VOLTage RANGe PTPeak and then the trigger level TRIGger LEVel Limitations For the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments the peak to peak value of input channel 4 can only be set to 0 8V and 8V Example Send RST Resets the instrument Send SENSe VOLTage2 RANGe PTPe
208. l compliance The CALCulate1 CALCulate2 commands use the MATH1 and MATH2 features of the CombiScope instrument 4 38 COMMAND REFERENCE CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform FREQuency STATe CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform FREQuency TYPE CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform FREQuency WINDow Syntax CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform FREQuency STATe lt Boolean gt CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform FREQuency TYPE ABSolute RELative CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform FREQuency WINDow RECTangular HAMMing HANNing n 1 2 Query form CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform FREQuency STATe Response 0 1 Query form CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform FREQuency TYPE Response ABS REL Query form CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform FREQuency WINDow Response RECT HAMM HANN Description The CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform FREQuency TYPE command selects between RELative and ABSolute FFT calculation The CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform FREQuency WINDow command defines the window type that is used with the FFT function The FFT RECTangular function transforms a repetitive time amplitude trace into its power spectrum Displayed is the amplitude vertical versus the frequency horizontal The FFT HAMMing and HANNing functions reduce the side lobes by applying a Hamming or Hanning window to the input signal This improves the visibility of the minor frequency components if the MATH1 MATH2 FFT PARAM limited area function is not accurately selected The result of the FFT fu
209. le the frequency amplitude period positive and negative pulse width of the Probe Adjust signal are measured and displayed 10 times This is done automatically by using the CONFigure READ and FETCh measurement instructions Application summary e 10 1 probe between channel 1 and the Probe Adjust signal 2000 Hz 600 mV e Configure for measuring the Probe Adjust voltage of 600 mV and frequency of about 2000 Hz by sending CONFigure VOLTage FREQuency 0 6 2000 1 e send the following queries 10 times and read the corresponding responses READ FREQuency Initiates and fetches a frequency measurement FETCh AMPLitude Fetches the measured amplitude FETCh PERiod Fetches the measured period FETCh PWIDth Fetches the measured positive pulse width FETCh NWIDth Fetches the measured negative pulse width e Print the received signal characteristics Notice that the sum of the positive and negative pulse width equals the period and that the inverse period equals the frequency Application program Note The program is also supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPA11 BAS REM INCLUDE QBDECL BAS DECLARE SUB errorcheck DIM res AS STRING 100 Dimension response string DIM cmd AS STRING Declare command string EndEOI 1 Termination Send on LineFeed amp EOI APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES 3 StopEOI 256 Termination Receive on EOI CLS Clears Output Screen CALL SendIFC 0 r Clears the
210. le the overshoot value on the rising edge of the Probe Adjust signal is measured This is done by programming the input conditions in the RUN mode INITiate CONTinuous ON followed by a single shot measurement of the peak to peak PTPeak value and the rise time overshoot percentage RISE OVERshoot The rise time overshoot value is calculated from the rise time overshoot percentage as follows PTPeak RISE OVERshoot V 100 Application summary e Connect a 10 1 probe between channel 1 and the Probe Adjust signal 2000 Hz 600 mV e Program the following input conditions AC input coupling Continuous trigger initiation RUN mode Trigger source channel 1 Trigger level zero to get a stable signal Sweep time of 1 ms 100 us div to obtain two Probe Adjust signal periods on the display Peak to peak value of 1 6V 0 2 V div to keep the positive and negative edge on the display e Stop the program to make an overshoot on the Probe Adjust signal This can be done by turning the screw on the head of the probe e Measure and print the peak to peak value e Measure the rise time overshoot percentage e Calculate and print the rise time overshoot value Application program Note program is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPA12 BAS APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES A 5 A 1 3 Reading measurement values In the following example measurement values are read into the computer as calcula
211. lect one of the supported GPIB plotters set its address at 22 and connect the plotter via IEEE to the controller Create a screen picture on the DSO that you want to plot and run the following program DIM addr 2 Dimensions address array DIM response AS STRING 15000 Dimensions response string CALL IBTMO 0 13 Timeout at 10 seconds CALL Send 0 8 HCOPy DEVice PM8277 1 Selects the PM8277 plotter CALL Send 0 8 HCOPY DATA 1 Requests for hardcopy data CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the hardcopy data length IBCNT number of read bytes PRINT Number of hardcopy bytes length okk ke ke first 2 characters of the response block data are 0 preamble for indefinite length They must not be sent to the plotter so send characters 3 until 3 length 2 okk ke e CALL Send 0 22 MID response 3 length 2 0 detection CALL Send 0 22 1 End of data block 3 68 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 13 Real Time Clock The real time clock keeps track of the current date and time The date and time are stamped on acquired waveforms to be sent to a computer or to be output to a hardcopy device The time of stamping is also the time of the acquisition trigger The SYSTem TIME command sets the time in hours minutes and seconds Only a 24 hours time format is supported The format of the displayed time cannot be selected The SYSTem DATE command s
212. lecting 8 wire or 7 wire via front panel control The RTS Request To Send line control is coupled to the DTR Data Terminal Ready line control After a RST command the DTR RTS control remains unchanged After power on the oscilloscope is in its local state controlled via front panel GR command SCPI command remote IEEE LOCAL key LOCAL key state GL command GTL rtl code ST7228 Figure 4 1 Local remote control Example Send gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol DTR ON Selects the 3 wire control Front panel compliance The SYSTem COMMunicate SERial CONTrol command is the remote equivalent of the front panel REMOTE SETUP RS232 SETUP option of the UTILITY menu 4 98 COMMAND REFERENCE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive BAUD SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit BAUD SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive BITS SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit BITS SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive PACE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit PACE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive PARity TYPE SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit PARity TYPE Syntax Query form Response Query form Response SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive BAUD lt baudrate gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit BAUD lt baudrate gt lt baudrate gt 75 110 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 MIN MAX SYSTem COMMunicate SERial RECeive BITS 7 8 SYSTem COMMunicate SERial TRANsmit BITS 7
213. licitly by a READ or MEASure instruction When the CombiScope instrument receives the ABORt command any acquisition that is in progress is aborted immediately and the instrument returns to the IDLE state The same occurs when RST is received The ABORt command distinguishes from RST in that RST also resets the instrument settings whereas ABORt does not For example when INITiate CONTinuous is set to ON a RST command not only aborts the pending acquisition and forces the instrument to the IDLE state but it also sets INITiate CONTinuous to OFF preventing the acquisition to initiate again Since ABORt does not affect the instrument settings an aborted acquisition cycle is immediately initiated again When the instrument is in the IDLE state the no pending operation flag that is associated with the acquisition is set True The OPC and OPC commands use this flag to signal their Operation Completed response Notice that if INITiate CONTinuous is set to ON the instrument does not return to the IDLE state when an acquisition cycle has completed This means that no Operation Completed response is generated after the and OPC commands 3 20 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 4 1 1 Triggering After the measurement is initiated the CombiScope instrument starts the real acquisition when the trigger conditions are satisfied e g when the selected trigger event occurs The trigger conditions can be ignored during a spe
214. lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger STARt VIDeo FIELd SELect ALL NUMBer lt NRf gt 112 1 MINimum Selects field1 triggering 2 MAXimum Selects field2 triggering ALL Selects lines triggering NUMBer Selects field triggering TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo FIELd NUMBer MINimum MAXimum TRIGger STARt VIDeo FIELd NUMBer lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum 1 2 1 Field1 triggering selected 2 Field2 triggering selected If MINimum was specified 1 is returned If MAXimum was specified 2 is returned TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo FIELd SELect TRIGger STARt VIDeo FIELd SELect ALL NUMB ALL Lines triggering selected NUMB Field triggering selected 4 128 COMMAND REFERENCE Description The TRIGger VIDeo FIELd SELect command programs the video trigger mode to field or lines The TRIGger VIDeo FIELd NUMBer command selects between field1 and field2 After a RST command lines triggering ALL and field number 1 is selected Notice that there exists a coupling between selecting field1 field2 using the TRIGger VIDeo FIELd NUMBer command and selecting the line number using the TRIGger VIDeo LINE command Programming the line number automatically sets the field1 2 triggering and programming field1 2 recalculates the selected line number as follows from field1 1 312 to field2 line nr line nr 625 2 gt from field2 313 625 to field1 line line nr 625 2 Example
215. ly simplify maintenance and modification of existing application programs that have been written by other persons or for other instrument functions All major CombiScope instrument functions are controlled by standard SCPI commands Although the functionality provided is the same the way the oscilloscope is controlled via the remote interface differs in some aspects from the front panel operation This is because the local front panel operation is designed to allow you to take maximum advantage of the interactive communication possibilities offered by the display screen This allows for additional information and guidance during the process of local operation The remote command set is based upon an instrument model that is easy to understand This model provides a structured survey of the implemented instrument functions and serves as a guide towards the commands that control these functions This other view allows for optimal and easy access of the instrument functions when operated from the remote interface Additionally measurement instruction set allows for easy programming of measurement tasks for a wide variety of signal characteristics USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 3 3 2 Fundamental Programming Concepts The remote operation of your CombiScope instrument can be accessed using different programming concepts The concept to be chosen depends upon the application of the instrument in the remote programming environment Each of
216. m DISPlay MENU STATe Response 0 1 0 Display turned off 1 Display turned on Description Switches the display of the softkey menu field on or off After a RST command the display is turned off Example Send RST Selects TB MODE menu with display off Send DISPlay MENU STATe ON Switches TB MODE menu display on Front panel compliance The DISPlay MENU STATe command remotely enables one of the front panel menus TB MODE TRIGGER DTB SETUPS CURSORS ACQUIRE DISPLAY MATH MEASURE SAVE RECALL UTILITY or VERT MENU 4 48 COMMAND REFERENCE DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT lt n gt DATA Syntax DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT lt n gt DATA 1 n 11 12 13 20 21 30 40 51 52 60 61 Indicates that the measurement result field is window 1 1 21 10 11 12 13 20 21 30 40 51 52 60 61 MEAS result is returned 52 result is returned Delta V Delta Y is returned under the following conditions TYPE ANALOG MODE DIGITAL MODE Delta V X deflection off X versus Y off Delta Y X deflection on X versus Y on V1 is returned V2 is returned DC voltage VDC is returned Delta T is returned under the following conditions TYPE ANALOG MODE DIGITAL MODE Delta T X deflection off X versus Y off Frequency 1 delta T is returned Delta X is returned under the following conditions TYPE ANALOG MODE DIGITAL MODE Delta X X deflection on X versus Y on The phase between 2 chann
217. m KEY 110 DISPlay MENU MEASure SYSTem KEY n DELAYED TIMEBASE DEL D TB key DTB key TIME DIV 5 4 key TIME DIV ns gt menu DEL DTB softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem SET 18 SYSTem KEY 402 SYSTem KEY 403 SYSTem KEY 404 DISPlay MENU DMODe SYSTem KEY n DIFFERENTIATE MATHPLUS key MATH menu MATH softkeys n 1 6 MATH1 2 differentiate ON OFF PARAM window samples SYSTem key 111 DISPlay MENU MATH SYSTem KEY n CALCulate 1 2 DERivative S TATe CALCulate 1 2 DER ivative P OINts DISPLAY MENU key DISPLAY menu DISPLAY softkeysn 1 6 TEXT USERTEXT SYSTem KEY 112 DISPlay MENU DISPlay SYSTem KEY n DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT 1 DIGITAL Mode INS TrumentNS ELect DIG ital INSTrument SE Lect 1 key ANALOG SYSTem KEY 106 ENVELOPE key ACQUIRE SYSTem KEY 107 menu ACQUIRE ENVELOPE softkeys n 1 6 DISPlay MENU ACQuire SYSTem KEY n Error handling see Status handling Event handling see Status handling 20 CROSS REFERENCES FUNCTION KEYS MENUS RELATED SCPI COMMAND S FFT FAST FOURIER TRANSFORMATION MATHPLUS key MATH menu MATH softkeys n 1 6 MATH1 2 FFT ON OFF PARAM select FFT windows read FFT amplitude frequency select absolute relative FFT SYSTem KEY 111 DISPlay MENU MATH SYSTem KEY n CALCulate 1 2 TRANsform F REQuency S TATE CALCulate 1 2 TRANsform F REQ uency WINDow RECTangular
218. m KEY command simulates the action of pressing a front panel key specified by the rounded integer value of the key number The SYSTem KEY query returns the key number corresponding to the last key that was pressed A value of 1 indicates that no key was pressed since power on or after a RST command If the URQ user request bit in the standard Event Status Register ESR is set a key on the front panel has been pressed This URQ bit can be used to signal the event of pressing a key on the front panel to the controller Note With this command the pressing of one key at the same time is simulated A combination e g STATUS 4 TEXT OFF at the same time cannot be simulated The command execution is finished directly However the actions that take place in the instrument as a result of a SYSTem KEY command can last longer A SYSTem KEY command cannot be synchronized by sending a WAI or OPC immediately thereafter Example SYSTem KEY 101 WAI continues program execution immediately WAI ignored although the AUTOSET key 101 still continues for a few seconds COMMAND REFERENCE 4 103 FRONTPANELKEY lt NR1 gt FRONT PANEL KEY lt NR1 gt EXCEPTIONS Softkey 1 top VERT MENU Softkey 2 AVERAGE Softkey 3 TRIG 1 Softkey 4 TRIG 2 Softkey 5 TRIG 3 e 33x08 Softkey 6 bottom TRIG 4 AUTOSET CAL no effect SETUPS 1 AMPL mv A UTILITY 1 AUTO RANGE ANALOG 1 CH1 4 CH2 ACQUIRE 1 AMPL mv A SAVE 1 AUTO RAN
219. m per division This minimum value is used as the noise level to prevent auto attenuation from trying to adjust noise on an open input channel PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 INITiate CONTinuous ON 1 Auto triggering CALL Send 0 8 SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe VOLTage2 1 SetsCH20n CALL Send 0 8 SENSe VOLTage2 RANGe AUTO ON 1 Sets auto attenuation for channel 2 ON and switches to AC signal coupling 3 42 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 8 Time Base Control In the digital mode the SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO command allows you to enable autoranging of the main timebase MTB 3 8 1 Number of samples The TRACe POINts command allows you to set the number of sample points which is the total acquisition length for all traces The number of samples is limited to discrete values refer to the TRACe POINts command reference for a detailed specification of these values After a RST command the number of samples is 512 Note Ifthe number of samples is changed the contents of all trace memories is cleared So all previously stored traces are lost PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Acquisition length 2512 samples CALL Send 0 8 TRACe POINts CH1 8192 1 Acquisition lengthd 28192 samples 3 8 2 Time base speed The SENSe SWEep TIME command specifies the time base of a sweep which is the time duration of one complete trace acquisition Because the SENSe SWEep TIME values are limited in the digital mode
220. mand DIM response AS STRING 1033 Dimensions trace buffer CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Resets the instrument Trigger source becomes IMMediate Number of trace samples becomes 512 Number oftrace sample bits becomes 16 CALL Send 0 8 CONFigure AC 1 1 Configures for optimal AC RMS settings CALL Send 0 8 TRIGger SOURce BUS 1 Triggersource GPIB OPEN 1 10 Opens file TRACE10 FOR i 1 TO 10 10 sequential trace acquisitions CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 Initiates an acquisition CALL Send 0 8 TRG 1 Triggers via the GPIB CALL Send 0 8 WAI TRACe CH1 1 Requests for channel 1 trace Notice the WAI before TRACe The WAI command takes care that TRACe CH1 command is executed when the INITiate command is finished CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the channel 1 trace PRINT 1 responses Writes the trace buffer to file NEXT i Next trace acquisition CLOSE Closes file TRACE10 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 31 3 4 3 Conversion of trace data The trace data is sent as a block of binary codes Trace samples can be formatted to consist of 8 bits 1 byte or 16 bits 2 bytes codes which can be selected by the FORMat command Refer to section 3 10 1 Trace formatting for a further explanation of this command After RST the samples are sent as 2 byte codes When samples are formatted as two bytes the most significant byte msb i
221. mary of all commands and parameters in alphabetical order beginning with the common commands The corresponding queries of the commands are not listed If command has no query this is reported in the column NOTES as no query If only a query exists it is reported in the column NOTES as query only COMMAND PARAMETERS NOTES CAL query only response 0 1 CLS no query ESE numeric data range 0 255 ESR query only IDN query only OPC response to OPC is always 1 OPT query only RCL numeric data range 0 10 RST no query SAV numeric data range 1 10 SRE numeric data range 0 255 STB query only TRG no query TST query only WAI no query 4 6 COMMAND REFERENCE COMMAND PARAMETERS NOTES ABORt no query CALCulate lt n gt lt n gt 1 2 DER ivative alias DIF F erential POINTS numeric data MAX MIN range 73 5 129 STATe Boolean FEED trace name trace name CHn n 1 4 i 1 8 standard memory i 29 50 extended memory FILTer FREQuency POINtS numeric data MAX MIN range 3 5 41 STATe Boolean INTegral STATe Boolean MATH E XP Ression trace name operation trace name trace name n operation STATe Boolean TRANsform FREQuency STATe Boolean TYPE ABSolute RELative WINDow RECTangular HAMMing HANNing HISTogram STATe
222. meters Measures the time of the first occurrence of the MAXimum voltage of the input signal The unit of TMAXimum is seconds 4 70 COMMAND REFERENCE TMINimum RISE O VERshoot RISE P REShoot RISE TIME No parameters Measures the time of the first occurrence of the MINimum voltage of the input signal The unit of TMINimum is seconds No parameters Measures the overshoot of the first rising edge of a waveform expressed as a percentage of the waveform AMPLitude The rise overshoot is the difference between the HIGH value and the MAXimum positive peak value to which the signal initially rises as shown in figure 3 2 The overshoot value in volts is calculated as follows overshoot value overshoot percentage AMPLitude 100 No parameters Measures the preshoot of the first rising edge of a waveform expressed as a percentage of the waveform AMPLitude The preshoot is the difference between the LOW value and the negative peak value to which the signal initially false as shown in figure 3 2 The preshoot value in volts is calculated as follows preshoot value preshoot percentage AMPLitude 100 reference low reference high lt expected_time gt lt time_resolution gt Measures the rise time of the first rising edge of a waveform This is the time interval during which the instantaneous signal value increases from the REFerence LOW to the REFerence HIGH value as shown in figure
223. meters of these drivers are defined by the device handler GPIB COM and by the QuickBASIC program code The following drivers and parameters are used in the program examples e IEEE 488 2 driver Send is used to send a command or query to an instrument CALL Send board address command lt eot gt e IEEE 488 2 driver SendSetup is used to prepare one or more devices to receive data bytes The controller becomes talker and the device becomes listener CALL SendSetup lt board gt lt addresslist gt e IEEE 488 2 driver SendDataBytes is used to send data bytes from a talking controller to a listening device CALL SendDataBytes board data lt eot gt e IEEE 488 2 driver Receive is used to read a response string from an instrument CALL Receive board address response lt term gt e 488 2 driver SendIFC is used to clear the GPIB interface CALL SendIFC board e IEEE 488 2 driver IDTMO is used to specify a time out period for the interface board CALL board lt timeout gt Explanation of the parameters used in the IEEE 488 2 drivers e board IEEE board identification inside the PC default board address 0 e lt address gt IEEE instrument address default CombiScope instrument address 8 e lt addresslist gt Array containing GPIB device addresses terminated by the constant 1 FFFF hex e
224. mmand set is comparable with the way instruments are traditionally controlled This concept gives you full control over all functions and power of a modern oscilloscope However for maximum benefit of all the advanced features of your CombiScope instrument you need some understanding of their remote operation Functions of the CombiScope instrument that belong together are grouped into subsystems There are several subsystems each representing a particular function The instrument model in the following figure gives an overview of the most important subsystems DISPlay CALCulate d INPut I SENSe TRIGger 577155 Figure 3 1 Instrument Model for CombiScope instruments EXPLANATION OF THE INSTRUMENT MODEL e Allfunctions that deal with signal conditioning are part of the INPut subsystem e n similar way the SENSe subsystem contains the data acquisition part where the analog signal is converted into a digital value e results of the acquisition are stored in a TRACe subsystem memory e Post processing functions on the acquired data are available in the CALCulate subsystem e TRIGger subsystem deals with the control of the acquisition process e DISPlay subsystem handles the front panel display functions 3 6 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS Functions in a particular subsystem are always controlled by commands that begin with the name of that su
225. mote equivalent of the front panel AUTO RANGE MTB key 4 86 COMMAND REFERENCE SENSe VOLTage n DC RANGe AUTO Syntax SENSe VOLTage lt n gt DC RANGe AUTO lt Boolean gt n 11121344 Note Channel 3 and 4 not applicable for Query form SENSe VOLTage lt n gt DC RANGe AUTO Response 0 1 0 Autoranging attenuator channel lt n gt switched off 1 Autoranging attenuator channel lt n gt switched on Description Switches the autoranging function of channel lt n gt on or off In the analog mode the error message 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated The autoranging attenuator function is automatically switched off when the following occurs Attenuation value is programmed SENSe VOLTage lt n gt RANGe PTPeak channel is switched off SENSe FUNCtion OFF XTIMe VOLTage lt n gt The Main Time Base MTB is switched off applicable channel addition function e g CH1 CH2 is switched on SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIMe VOLTage SUM 1 2 After a RST command autoranging attenuation for all channels is switched off Note Switching the autoranging attenuator on for a channel automatically sets the input signal coupling for that channel to INPut lt n gt COUPling AC Also the main timebase is switched from variable VAR into 1 2 5 step mode Example Send RST Switches CH1 on Send gt SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIMe VOLTage2 Switches CH2 on
226. n execution error is reported PACE sets pacing XON XOFF or no pacing at all NONE of the EIA 232 D RS 232 C interface for both the receive and transmit channel PARity sets the parity type of the EIA 232 D RS 232 C interface for both the receive and transmit channel The parity type can be even EVEN odd ODD or no parity at all NONE If the type of parity is NONE and the number of data bits is 7 an execution error is reported After a RST command the interface settings remain unchanged Example Send gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BAUD 1200 Baudrate becomes 1200 Send gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERial BITS 8 Number of data bits becomes 8 Send gt SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PACE XON becomes true Send SYSTem COMMunicate SERial PARity EVEN Paritytypebecomes EVEN Front panel compliance The SYSTem COMMunicate SERial commands are the remote equivalent of the front panel REMOTE SETUP RS232 SETUP option of the UTILITY menu 4 100 COMMAND REFERENCE SYSTem DATE Syntax SYSTem DATE lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt year lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum Range from 1992 to 2091 month lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum Range from 1 to 12 day lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum Range from 1 to 31 Query form SYSTem DATE MlNimum MAXimum MAXimum MINimum MAXimum Response lt year gt lt month gt lt day gt The date values returned are of typ
227. n one real time acquisition To allow you to go below the 200 ns limit the CombiScope instrument uses particular random sampling techniques where points in the requested trace are collected from a number of successive acquisitions The result returned is a reconstruction of the original signal out of several acquisitions which is not real time When real time acquisition needs to be guaranteed the command SENSe SWEep REALtime STATe must be set to ON This disables the random sampling techniques The trade off is that the SENSe SWEep TIME range is limited to 200 ns After RST the REALtime command is set to OFF The peak detection function allows the Analog to Digital Converters ADC to operate at their highest speed even when a lower time base speed is selected The result is that maximum and minimum peaks of the signal are detected even at lower time base speeds This is called oversampling SENSe SWEep PDETection STATe command allows you to switch peak detection on or off PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Real time mode off CALL Send 0 8 SENSe SWEep REALtime ON 1 Real time mode on CALL Send 0 8 SENSe SWEep PDETection ON 1 Sets peak detection on 3 44 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 8 A X Autoranging time base The AUTO RANGE function of the Main Time Base MTB adjusts the time base automatically so that two to six waveform periods are displayed on the screen If a waveform does
228. n t contain enough information to calculate its period the time base is adjusted to acquire a minimum of two periods One period of a signal is determined by three successive crossings of the hysteresis band with the input signal The level of the hysteresis band can be set using the TRIGger LEVel command X1 O TRIGGER HYSTERESIS 54 LEVEL M PERIOD LENGTH Figure 3 16 Definition of a signal period LIMITATION When operating with an acquisition length of 512 points the maximum input frequency is 25 MHz For all other acquisition lengths the maximum input frequency is 50 MHz When the input frequency is greater than the maximum alias detection frequency it is no longer possible to detect aliasing PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 INITiate CONTinuous ON 1 Auto triggering CALL Send 0 8 TRIGger SOURce INTernall 1 Sets trigger source CALL Send 0 8 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO ON 1 Sets auto time base on USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 45 3 9 Post Processing TRACe cH1 LL H 2 1 1 M50 1 CALCulatei e4 CH2 H M2 l M22 M32 M50 2 SENSe CH3 23 M33 M50 3 CH4 14 M24 4 M50 4 gt CALCulate He
229. n the output queue when all pending operations are finished So when the OPC query is received the instrument holds off the GPIB handshake as long as it is addressed as talker and there are device operations pending Operations exist as for example INITiate CONTinuous ON that never complete Sending OPC during this operation prevents the instrument from responding to further program messages Note RST command the CLS command and power on cancel the effect of an OPC command or an OPC query Restrictions Be careful The GPIB controller may interrupt the program by means of timeout So verify first whether the timeout period is long enough to cover the operation time of the instrument Example Send gt RST CLS Resets instrument clears status data Send INITiate CONTinuous ON Continuous initiation Send OPC ESR Read 0 Indicates that the instrument is busy sweeping Send INITiate CONTinuous OFF initiation any more Send OPC ESR Reade 1 Indicates that the instrument has finished sweeping COMMAND REFERENCE 4 21 OPT Option identification Syntax OPT Response option lt option gt option name serial nr sw level lt name gt IEEE EXT EM MP lt serial_nr gt Serial number is always 0 lt sw_level gt Software level is always 0 Description query reports which options are present If lt option gt IEEE 0 0 th
230. nce_middle gt lt reference_middle gt lt expected_period gt lt period_resolution gt lt reference_middle gt lt reference_low gt lt reference_high gt lt expected_time gt lt time_resolution gt DCYCle alias for PDUTycycle FTIMe alias for FALL TIME RTIMe alias for RISE TIME Note 3 lt channel_list gt Note 4 lt trace_list gt 01 02 03 04 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Mi_1 Mi_2 Mi_3 Mi_4 i 1 8 standard memory i 1 50 extended memory COMMAND REFERENCE 4 13 4 3 Command Descriptions The description of corresponding commands and queries is combined Each command query description starts on a new page A description consists of the following parts COMMAND HEADER Syntax Specifies the syntax of a command or query header parameters to be placed on the GPIB Different programming languages such as BASIC C Pascal have different ways of representing data that is to be output onto the GPIB It is up to the programmer to determine the methods to output the command required for the programming language used Alias Specifies alternative syntax possibilities Query form Specifies the syntax of the corresponding query optional Response Specifies the response of the instrument to a query optional Description Describes what the command query does limitations Specifies possible limitations with respect to using and operation Example Program
231. nce_middle gt Measures the negative duty cycle The negative duty cycle is the ratio percentage of the negative width NWIDth and the PERiod of the waveform as shown in figure 3 2 lt reference_middle gt Measures the negative width which is the time duration of the negative pulse This time period extends from the moment that the first falling edge equals the REFerence MIDDle until the next rising edge equals the same reference level as shown in figure 3 2 The negative width is expressed in seconds lt reference_middle gt Measures the positive duty cycle The positive duty cycle is the ratio percentage of the positive width PWIDth and the PERiod of the waveform as shown in figure 3 2 DCYCle is an alias of PDUTycycle lt expected_period gt lt period_resolution gt Measures the period of the input signal The period is the inverse of the FREQuency and is expressed in seconds No parameters Measures the peak to peak value of the input signal The peak to peak value is the difference between the MAXimum and MINimum value of the waveform The PTPeak value is expressed in volts reference middle Measures the positive width which is the time duration of the positive pulse This time period extends from the moment that the first rising edge equals the REFerence MIDDIle until the next falling edge equals the same reference level as shown in figure 3 2 The positive width is expressed in seconds No para
232. nction is stored in M1_1 for CALCulate1 and in M2_1 for CALCulate2 After RST command the FFT type is RELative the FFT window is RECTangular and the FFT functions are switched OFF COMMAND REFERENCE 4 39 Send CALCulate2 TRANsform FREQuency TYPE RELative Selects relative MATH2 FFT calculation Send CALCulate2 TRANsform FREQuency WINDow HANNing Selects MATH2 FFT HANNing window Send CALCulate2 TRANsform FREQuency STATe ON Switches MATH2 FFT on Front panel compliance The CALCulate1 and CALCulate2 commands use the MATH1 and MATH2 features of the CombiScope instrument 4 40 COMMAND REFERENCE CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform HISTogram STATe Syntax CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform HISTogram STATe Boolean n 1 2 Query form CALCulate lt n gt TRANsform HIS Togram STATe Response 0 1 0 Histogram function turned off 1 Histogram function turned on Description This command switches the HISTogram function on or off The result of the histogram function is stored in M1_1 for CALCulate1 and in M2_1 for CALCulate2 After a RST command the histogram function is turned off Example Send CALCulate TRANsform HISTogram STATe Switches the histogram function on Front panel compliance The CALCulate1 and CALCulate2 commands use the MATH1 and MATH2 features of the CombiScope instrument COMMAND REFERENCE 4 41 CALibration ALL Syntax CALibrati
233. nel 2 ON Send READ AC 02 Reads AC RMS on channel 2 Read amp AC RMS DC offset voltage Send gt INPut2 COUPling Couples true AC RMS Send READ AC 02 Reads AC RMS on channel 2 Read lt AC RMS voltage Send INPut2 COUPling GROund Couples to ground Send READ AC 2 Reads AC RMS on channel 2 Read lt AC RMS ground level voltage Front panel compliance The INPut lt n gt COUPling command is the remote equivalent of the front panel AC DC GND key COMMAND REFERENCE 4 63 INPut lt n gt FILTer LPASs STATe INPut lt n gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency Syntax INPut lt n gt FILTer LPASs STATe Boolean n 1 21 3 4 INPut lt n gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency MINimum MAXimum MINimum Fixed at 20 MHz MAXimum Fixed at 20 MHz Note Channel 3 is not applicable for PM33x0B Response 2 00 07 Query form INPut lt n gt FILTer LPASs STATe Response 0 1 0 low pass filter off 1 Common low pass filter on Description The INP lt n gt FILT command turns the common low pass filter ON or OFF for all input channels independent of the value of n The INP lt n gt FILT FREQ query returns the cutoff frequency of the common low pass filter which is fixed at 20 MHz not programmable The filter can be turned ON or OFF with the INPut n FILTer LPASs STATe command The common low pass filter is called bandwidth limiter on the front panel BW LIMIT option in the
234. neration mechanism to interrupt the execution of the program and to execute the error reporting routine Therefore refer to section 3 14 4 2 PROGRAM EXAMPLE okk kk Read error message ok kk ke er SPACES 60 CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem ERRor 1 Requests for error CALL Receive 0 8 er 256 Reads error message PRINT Response to error query PRINT LEFTS er IBCNT 1 Displays error message 2 6 GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING 2 4 Acquiring Traces Trace acquisitions are started via the INITiate commands A single acquisition is done by sending a single INITiate command Continuous acquisitions are done by sending the INITiate CONTinuous ON command The TRACe query allows you to acquire a trace of signal samples from one of the following sources e An input channel e g CH2 input channel 2 e Atrace area a memory register e g 2 3 Memory register 2 trace 3 The number of trace samples acquisition length can be specified using the TRACe POINts command If your instrument has standard memory you can specify 512 2048 4096 or 8192 trace samples If your instrument has extended memory you can specify 512 8192 16384 or 32768 trace samples A TRACe POINts command specifies the acquisition length for all channels and memory registers Example Send gt TRACe POINts CH1 8192 Selects 8192 sample points for all traces The number of trace sample bits can be specified using the
235. ng a new acquisition as READ and MEASure do is undesired For that purpose READ is broken down into two additional instructions which are the INITiate IMMediate command and the FETCh query Executing this sequence of instructions is equivalent to READ The INITiate IMMediate command starts the acquisition FETCh determines the requested signal characteristic and returns the result This concept allows you to perform several different FETCh queries on a single set of acquisition data Example MEASure AC Configures the instrument to measure the RMS value of the AC component of the signal at input channel 1 starts the acquisition and returns the desired result FETCh FREQuency Determines and returns the frequency of the signal that is acquired by the preceding MEASure query FETCh RISE TIME Uses default parameters to determine and return the rise time of the first pulse As distinct from the READ query defaulting the measure function part of the FETCh query causes the CombiScope instrument to return the characteristic that was requested with the last executed FETCh READ or MEASure query For this reason the measure function should always be explicitly specified in the header of the FETCh query 3 16 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 3 7 Trigger control via GPIB You need a separate GPIB command to start a measurement synchronized with other instruments This is done by sending the TRG command or the GET
236. ng bit in the operation event register For example when you set bit 2 in this filter it will set bit 2 in the operation event register at the time bit 2 in the operation condition register is set changed from 0 to 1 After power on the contents of the negative transition filter is set to H7FFF The bits have the following value and meaning BIT DECIMAL MEANING NUMBER VALUE 0 1 CALibrating performing a calibration 2 4 RANGing currently autoranging autosetting 3 8 SWEeping busy with acquisition 5 32 Waiting for TRIGger INITiated 8 256 Instrument is in the digital mode 9 512 Pass Fail status bit 10 is valid 10 1024 Pass Fail status 1 test has failed other Not used Zero is returned Example Send STATus OPERation CONDition Requests for operational condition Read lt 4 The returned value 4 equals bit 2 set instrument is currently autoranging Send STATus OPERation ENABle 4 Enables report of bit 2 RANGing in operational event register Send STATus OPERation NTRansition 0 Disables all bit reports from 1 to 0 Send STATus OPERation PTRansition 4 Enables report of Autoranging started 0 gt 1 Send STATus OPERation EVENt Requests for operational event Read amp 4 The returned value 4 equals bit 2 set instrument has started autoranging Send STATus OPERation PTRansition 0 Disables all bit reports from 0 to 1 Send
237. ng the low pass or high pass filter FILTER FREQUENCY LOW PASS ON HIGH PASS ON 0 Hz DC coupling HF reject 10 Hz AC coupling HF reject 30 KHz LF reject HF reject Example Send TRIGger FILTer LPASs STATe ON Sets Low Pass filter on cutoff frequency 0 Hz DC coupling Automatically switches High Pass filter off Send TRIGger FILTer LPASs FREQuency 3E 4 Sets cutoff frequency 30 KHz LF reject Front panel compliance The TRIGger FILTer LPASs commands are the remote equivalent of the front panel TRIGGER MAIN TB ac dc If rej hf rej softkey menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 119 TRIGger SEQuence 1 HOLDoff TRIGger STARt HOLDoff Syntax TRIGger SEQuence 1 HOLDoff lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum Alias TRIGger STARt HOLDoff lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum lt NRf gt The hold off value expressed in percent The range is from 0 00 MINimum 0 to 1 00 MAXImum 100 Query form TRIiGger SEQuence 1 HOLDoff MINimum MAXimum TRIGger STARt HOLDoff MINimum MAXimum Response lt NR3 gt NR3 The hold off value in percent Description The hold off value specifies the hold off time after each Main Time Base sweep during which the MTB event detector is inhibited from acting on any new trigger For a specification of the minimum and maximum hold off time refer to the Reference Manual supplied In the digital mode the hold off time is used to process previously captured
238. nnel is 1 PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 INPut4 IMPedance 50 1 Setschannel4 impedance at 500 3 7 4 Input polarity The INPut lt n gt POLarity command allows you to set the polarity of the signal on the input channel 2 and 4 The polarity can be set to NORMal default or INVerted inverted signal PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 INPut2 POLarity NORMal 1 Sets INV CH2 off CALL Send 0 8 INPut4 POLarity INVerted 1 SetsINV on 3 7 5 Vertical range and offset The SENSe VOLTage lt n gt RANGe PTPeak command allows you to specify the peak to peak range of the signal acquisition over all 8 divisions of the display screen for each input channel separately From this peak to peak value the vertical sensitivity per division is calculated as follows vertical sensitivity lt peak to peak gt 8 After a RST command the peak to peak value is set at 1 6V for channel 1 which complies to a vertical sensitivity of 200 mV USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 41 Because the programmed PTPeak and OFFSet values directly affect the trace values they can be used to calculate the voltage amplitude of the corresponding trace samples As explained in section 3 4 3 3 Conversion to voltage values the voltage amplitude of a trace sample can be calculated from the equations Vs Ts 200 OFFSet for 8 bit sample traces Vs Ts 51200 PTPeak OFFSet for 16 bit sample traces
239. ns 3 13 Real Time Clock 3 14 Auto Calibration 3 15 Status Reporting 3 15 1 Status data for the CombiScope instruments 3 15 1 1 Operation status data 3 15 1 2 Questionable status data 3 15 2 How to reset the status data 3 15 3 How to enable status reporting 3 15 3 1 Program example using the status byte STB 3 15 3 2 Program example using a service request SRQ 3 15 4 How to report errors 3 15 4 1 Error reporting routine 3 15 4 2 Error reporting using the SRQ mechanism Post Processing 3 9 1 How to do post processing 3 9 1 1 Select the source for the post processing function 3 9 1 2 Specify the settings of the post processing function 3 9 1 8 Enable the post processing function 3 9 1 4 Check the result of the post processing function 3 9 2 Mathematical calculations 3 9 3 Differentiating and integrating traces 3 9 4 Frequency domain transformations 3 9 5 Histogram functions 3 9 6 Frequency filtering Screen Display Functions 3 11 1 Brightness control 3 11 2 Display functions
240. ns correspond to voltage values This relation is shown in the figure below and is determined by the settings that are programmed by the SENSe VOLTage RANGe PTPeak SENSe VOLTage RANGe OFFSet commands Amplitude Screen Trace sample value Vs position Ps value Ts ovont S yas 32767 127 OFFSet PTPeak 2 lop 100 7 25600 100 OFFSet PTPeak v OrFrSet 0 ______________ 0 0 i OFFSet PTPeak 2 ____ _ 100 _______ 25600 100 bottom 32768 128 ST7188 Figure 3 12 Relation between screen position and amplitude value The relation between the screen position Ps and the corresponding voltage amplitude Vs is expressed by the equations Vs Ps PTPeak 200 OFFSet for 8 bit sample traces Vs Ps PTPeak 51200 OFFSet for 16 bit sample traces As explained in section 3 4 3 there is also a relation between the screen position Ps and the value Ts of a trace sample This relation is expressed by the equations Ps Ts for 8 bit sample traces Ps Ts 25600 100 Ts 256 for 16 bit sample traces Eliminating Ps from the preceding equations results in a relation that can be used to calculate the voltage value Vs from a trace sample Ts This relation is expressed by the equations Vs Ts 200 PTPeak OFFSet for 8 bit sample traces Vs Ts 51200 PTPeak OFFSet for 16 bit sample traces USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 35 PROGRAM EXAMPLE
241. ns the fundamental programming concepts The other sections and subsections represent the functional use of your CombiScope instrument COMMAND REFERENCE Is a complete alphabetical reference of all implemented SCPI commands In the beginning a command summary is given to provide you with a quick reference 1 2 ABOUT THIS MANUAL Appendix A APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES Appendix A describes some application program examples The application programs are supplied on floppy Appendix CROSS REFERENCES Appendix B gives cross references between SCPI commands and front panel keys softkey menu options and instrument functions Appendix C MANUAL CONVENTIONS Appendix C explains which abbreviations and symbols are used in the manual It also gives a list of the tables figures and documents referenced Appendix STANDARDS INFORMATION Appendix D gives information regarding SCPI and IEEE 488 2 standards Appendix E SUMMARY OF SYSTEM SETTINGS Appendix E lists the system settings per functional group node plus the applicable instrument settings per node A full alphabetical index is given at the end of the manual GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING 2 1 2 GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING 2 1 Preparations for SCPI Programming To program your CombiScope instrument you need a system setup and a programming environment Various program examples refer to PROGRAM EXAMPLE are given in the following sections These program
242. nts peak to peak Trigger Coupling The TRIGger LPASs and TRIGger HPASs commands allow you to select the Main Time Base MTB trigger coupling by programming a fixed cutoff frequency The possible trigger coupling options AC coupling DC coupling Low Frequency reject and High Frequency reject are mutually exclusive The TRIGger LPASs and TRIGger HPASs commands are also mutually exclusive So activating the Low Pass filter will switch off the High Pass filter and vice versa After a RST command the cutoff frequency is 10 Hertz which selects trigger coupling AC Note When the trigger source is INTernal lt n gt signal coupling for one input channel n can be programmed to AC DC or GROund using the INPut lt n gt COUPling command 3 22 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS DC COUPLING 0 Hz cutoff frequency DC coupling causes the signal to be passed over the full bandwidth from 0 Hz to 60 100 200 MHz 0dB DC COUPLING DC FULL BANDWIDTH FREQ sua Figure 3 4 DC Coupling PROGRAM EXAMPLE Select DC coupling on input signal channel 2 SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIMe VOLTage2 Sets CH2 on INPut2 COUPling DC Sets CH2 input signal DC coupled TRIGger SOURce INTernal2 Sets trigger source CH2 Select DC coupling triggering TRIGger FILTer LPASs STATe ON Sets Low Pass filter on cutoff frequency 0 Hz this selects MTB trigger DC coupling AC COUPLING 10 Hz cutoff f
243. nus or by programming CALCulate TRANsform FREQuency TYPE ABSolute Selects abs values CALCulate TRANsform FREQuency TYPE RELative Selects rel values CALOulate TRANsform FREQuency STATe ON Enables MATH1 FFT Note result of an FFT be expressed as a relative or an absolute amplitude value A relative FFT calculation consists of a frequency Hz and an amplitude in dB An absolute FFT calculation consists of a frequency Hz an amplitude in dBm dB with respect to 1 milliwatt dBy V dB with respect to 1 microvolt or Vrms Volt RMS as selected via the front panel CURSORS READOUT softkey menu Example Send gt DISPlay MENU MEASure Switches MEASURE menu display on Enable define th 51 function via the front panel MEASURE menu Send gt DISPlay WINDow TEXT1 DATA Queries MEAS result Read lt 51 result PRINT MEAS result Front panel compliance The DISPlay WINDow 1 TEXT n DATA query is the remote equivalent of the front panel CURSORS MATH and MEASURE keys and softkey menus 4 50 COMMAND REFERENCE DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT 1 CLEar Syntax DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT 1 CLEar 2 Indicates that the user text field is window 2 1 Is optional and has no meaning Description This command clears the contents of the user text field from the screen of the oscilloscope The result is that the user text is n
244. o longer displayed Example Send DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT STATe ON Enables display of text Send gt DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT CLEar Clears all user text Front panel compliance The DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT CLEar command is the remote equivalent of the delete user text option of the front panel DISPLAY TEXT menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 51 DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT 1 DATA Syntax DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT 1 DATA string data block data 2 Indicates that the user text field is window 2 string data Maximum 64 characters Examples this is a string this also block data Maximum 64 data bytes Examples 301 25 kL indefinite length 1471 25 definite length The result of both examples is that 1 25 will be displayed Take notice that character J has decimal value 25 which represents the character on the oscilloscope screen Description This command writes data into the user text field The result is that the data is displayed on the two text lines of the screen of the oscilloscope The first character or data byte is positioned on the first position of the first text line The 64th character or data byte is placed on the last position of the second text line Keyboard characters directly entered via the keyboard of your controller can be sent as string data Non keyboard characters must be sent as block data The table on the next page shows the character set of the CombiScopes
245. of trace points MTB 50 sweep time acq length 1 Calculates the MTB PRINT Main Time Base MTB s div Prints the MTB Front panel compliance The SENSe SWEep TIME command is the remote equivalent of the front panel TB MODE 5 VAR ns keys COMMAND REFERENCE 4 85 SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO Syntax SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO Boolean Query form SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO Response 0 1 0 Autoranging MTB switched off 1 Autoranging MTB switched on Description Switches the autoranging function of the Main Time Base MTB on or off In the analog mode the error message 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated The MTB autoranging function is automatically switched off when the following occurs Atime base value is programmed SENSe SWEep TIME Achannelis selected as trigger source TRIGger SOURce INTernal lt n gt while channel lt n gt is off SENSe FUNCtion STATe returns 0 The Main Time Base MTB is switched off After a RST command autoranging MTB is switched off Example Send RST Resets the instrument Send INITiate CONTinuous ON Sets Auto run mode Send TRIGger SOURce INTernal 1 Sets trigger source CH1 Send gt SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO ON Sets autoranging MTB on Send SENSe SWEep TIME 0 5 Sets sweep time at 500 ms and MTB becomes 50ms autoranging off Front panel compliance The SENSe SWEep TIME AUTO command is the re
246. ogramming tip For single shot measurements the trigger source must be one of the input channels n INTernal lt n gt instead of IMMediate software automatic trigger 4 126 COMMAND REFERENCE TRIGger SEQuence 1 TYPE TRIGger STARt TYPE Syntax TRIGger SEQuence 1 TYPE EDGE VIDeo LOGic Alias TRIiGger STARt TYPE EDGE VIDeo LOGic GLITch EDGE Selects edge triggering VIDeo Selects TV video triggering LOGic Selects logic triggering only for PM3384B 94B GLITch Selects glitch triggering only for PM33x0B Query form TRIGger SEQuence 1 TYPE TRIGger STARt TYPE Response EDGE VID LOG Description The TRIGger TYPE command controls the type of triggering After a RST command the trigger type is EDGE normal triggering Example Send TRIGger TYPE VIDeo Selects TV video triggering Front panel compliance The TRIGger TYPE command is the remote equivalent of the front panel TRIGGER MAIN TB edge tv logic softkey menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 127 TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo FIELd NUMBer TRIGger STARt VIDeo FIELd NUMBer TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo FIELd SELect TRIGger STARt VIDeo FIELd SELect Syntax Alias Query form Alias Response Query form Alias Response TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo FIELd NUMBer lt NRf gt MAXimum TRIGger SEQuence 1 VIDeo FIELd SELect ALL NUMBer TRIGger STARt VIDeo FIELd NUMBer
247. ollowing coupling exists between programming the cutoff frequency and de activating the low pass or high pass filter FILTER FREQUENCY LOW PASS ON HIGH PASS ON 0 Hz DC coupling HF reject 10 Hz AC coupling HF reject 30 KHz LF reject HF reject Example Send TRIGger FILTer HPASs STATe ON Sets High Pass filter on HF reject Automatically switches Low Pass filter off Front panel compliance The TRIGger FILTer HPASs commands are the remote equivalent of the front panel TRIGGER MAIN TB ac dc If rej hf rej softkey menu COMMAND REFERENCE 4 117 TRIGger SEQuence 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency TRIGger STARt FILTer LPASs FREQuency TRIGger SEQuence 1 FILTer LPASs STATe TRIGger STARt FILTer LPASs STATe Syntax Alias Query form Alias Response Query form Alias Response TRIGger SEQuence 1 FlLTer LPASs FREQuency lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger SEQuence 1 FlLTer LPASs STATe Boolean TRIGger STARt FlLTer LPASs FREQuency lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum TRIGger STARt FlLTer LPASs STATe lt Boolean gt lt NRf gt The cutoff frequency expressed in hertz Possible values are 0 Defines trigger DC coupling MINimum 10 Defines trigger AC coupling 30000 Defines LF reject MAXimum Boolean 0 OFF Sets low pass filter off 1 ON Sets low pass filter on TRIGger SEQuence 1 FlLTer LPASs FREQuency MINimum MAXimum TRIGger STARt FlLTer LPASs FREQuency MIN
248. ommand This sets the instrument to a fixed setup optimized for remote operation The status and error data of the instrument can be cleared by sending the CLS command PROGRAM EXAMPLE okk kk Reset the instrument and clear the status data CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Resets the instrument CALL Send 0 8 amp CLS 1 Clears the status data 2 2 2 How to identify the CombiScope instrument The identity of the instrument can be queried by sending the IDN query followed by reading the instrument response message The options of the instrument can be queried by sending the OPT query followed by reading the instrument response message PROGRAM EXAMPLE okk kk Read and print the identity and options of the instrument okk kk x response SPACES 65 CALL Send 0 8 IDN 1 Requests for identification CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the ident string PRINT Ident LEFT response Prints the ident string CALL Send 0 8 OPT 1 Requests for options CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the options string PRINT Options LEFT response Prints the options string 2 2 8 How to switch between digital and analog mode After power on a CombiScope instrument can be either in the digital or analog mode After a RST command the digital mode is selected The INSTrument sub system allows you to switch between the two modes This can be done
249. on ALL Query form CALibration ALL Response 0 1 Description The CALibration command performs an automatic internal self calibration No external means or operator interface is needed The CALibration command is an overlapped command which means that during calibration the Calibrating bit 0 in the OPERation status can be read to check whether calibration has finished or not If bit 0 0 calibration has finished If bit O 1 calibration is still busy possible calibration error is reported via bit 8 in the QUEStionable status If bit 8 0 calibration was successful If bit 8 1 calibration went wrong The CALibration query performs an automatic internal self calibration and reports the result of that calibration Also no external means or operator interface is needed The response indicates whether or not the instrument completed the self calibration without error A response of 0 indicates that the calibration executed successfully A response of 1 indicates that the calibration was not successful The CALibration query is the equivalent of the CAL query Limitation The calibration process lasts a couple of minutes During this time bit in the OPERation status is set indicating that calibration is busy This status information can only be requested if the calibration was started via the CALibration command This is because the CALibration query is a sequential command So the next command or query in the sam
250. on and therefore does not return a result For that purpose the CONFigure command must be followed by a READ query or by INItiate and FETCh Executing CONFigure and READ is equivalent to executing a MEASure query The parameters provide additional information about the signal to be measured or the desired result The oscilloscope uses these parameter values to provide the best possible settings for the specified task When the parameters are defaulted the oscilloscope chooses its own settings based upon the signal to be measured and its own trade offs After executing the CONFigure command the instrument settings are undefined The default VOLTage node specifies that the characteristic to be measured relates to a voltage signal For example the AC component of a voltage signal the rise time of a voltage signal etc Restrictions A CONFigure command may be executed only when the oscilloscope is in the digital mode INStrument SELect DlGital The digital mode is selected after RST Executing this query when the instrument is in the analog mode generates execution error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required 4 44 COMMAND REFERENCE Example 1 Send gt CONFigure VOLTage AC 0 6 82 Configures AC RMS channel2 expected voltage 600 mV Send INPut2 COUPling AC Channel 2 AC coupled Send READ AC 82 Initiates fetches AC RMS value Read lt first measured AC RMS value Send READ AC
251. on factor for input channel 1 is set at 10 1 using the softkey menu UTILITY Front panel compliance The SYSTem KEY command is the remote equivalent of pressing all front panel keys COMMAND REFERENCE 4 105 SYSTem SET Syntax SYSTem SET indefinite block Query form SYSTem SET node nr MAXimum node nr number specifying which node settings The following nodes are supported 0 End node indicator 1 2 3 4 Channel 1 2 3 4 settings 14 Probe scale settings 15 Common vertical settings 16 Horizontal settings 17 Main timebase settings 18 Delayed time base settings 19 Event trigger delay settings 20 SCPI trigger source 32 Cursor settings 33 Cursor autosearch settings 49 50 MEASurement 1 2 settings 51 Pass Fail test settings 65 66 1 2 settings 80 Display settings 81 Trace intensity settings 82 Display trace position settings 96 Setup label text 112 Autorange settings 128 Real time clock settings 240 Service factory settings MAXimum Response lt indefinite_block gt Description The SYSTem SET command programs the instrument to a complete or partial instrument setup defined by a node number using the instrument settings that were previously retrieved with the SYSTem SET query The instrument settings are binary settings bits and bytes that are changing dynamically In addition various settings are interdependent even settings divided
252. or e Dit 3 DDE Device Dependent Error e bit 2 QYE Query Error e bit 1 RQC Request Control e bit 0 OPC Operation Complete Notes indicates that the power supply has been turned off and on since the last time the register was read or cleared Bit 7 PON is always set true at power on indicates that the user has requested attention e g to return the instrument to local Bit 1 RQO is not used always 0 OPCindicates that the device has completed all previously started actions Example Send ESR Read lt 28 28 is equal to the binary value B11100 16 8 4 decimal which means that the bits 4 EXE 3 DDE and 2 QYE are set So an execution error a device dependent error and a query error have occurred since the last time the register was read COMMAND REFERENCE 4 19 IDN Identification Syntax IDN Response lt manufacturer gt lt model gt lt serial_number gt lt sw_level gt lt manufacturer gt E g FLUKE lt model gt E g PM3394B lt serial_number gt Always 0 lt sw_level gt lt sw_id gt lt mask_id gt lt UFO_id gt lt sw_id gt Firmware identification consisting of Software type e g SW3394BIM M Math Plus Software version e g V4 0 Software date year month day lt mask_id gt Mask identification e g UHM V1 0 lt UFO_id gt UFO identification e g UFO V2 0 Description The IDN query reports the identification
253. ore PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT elements separated by PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT SEPARATOR gt ELEMENTS PROGRAM MESSAGE UNIT Represents a single command programming data or a single query received by a device COMMAND MESSAGE UNIT Represents a single command or programming data received by a device QUERY MESSAGE UNIT Represents a single query sent form the controller to a device PROGRAM DATA A program data element is also referred to as a parameter It represents any of the following data types CHARACTER PROGRAM DATA gt A data type suitable for sending short mnemonic data generally where a numeric data type is not suitable Refer to character data of section 4 1 2 Data types lt DECIMAL NUMERIC PROGRAM DATA gt A data type suitable for sending decimal integers or fractions with or without exponents Refer to lt numeric_data gt of section 4 1 2 Data types lt NON DECIMAL NUMERIC PROGRAM DATA gt A data type suitable for sending integer numeric representations in base 16 hexadecimal 8 octal or 2 binary Refer to lt numeric_data gt of section 4 1 2 Data types lt STRING PROGRAM DATA gt A data type suitable for sending 7 bit ASCII character strings Refer to string data of section 4 1 2 Data types ARBITRARY BLOCK PROGRAM DATA A data type suitable for sending blocks of arbitrary 8 bit data bytes Refer to block data of section 4 1 2 Data types EXPRESSION PROGRAM DATA
254. orm DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT 1 STATe Response 0 1 0 Display turned off 1 Display turned on Description Switches the display of the user text field on or off After a RST command the display of user text is turned off Example Send DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT STATe OFF Turns off the display of the user text Front panel compliance The DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT STATe command is the remote equivalent of the user text on off option of the front panel DISPLAY TEXT menu 4 54 COMMAND REFERENCE FETCh Syntax Response FETCh VOLTage measure function voltage parameters measure parameters trace list trace name acquisition trace memory trace lt gt lt gt schannel list trace list Q trace name acquisition trace memory trace CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 These are predefined names for traces that contain the acquisition result of the input channels 1 to 4 Note and CH4 not for PM33x0B M lt i gt _ lt j gt These are predefined names for traces that may contain the result of previous acquisitions or the result of CALCulate processes Integer value in the range 1 to 50 that specifies the trace memory register number lt gt 110 8 standard memory lt gt 9 to 50 extended memory Integer value in the range 1 to 4 that specifies the sequence number of the channel trace in the memory register Not
255. ot percentage AMPLitude 100 reference low reference high cexpected time lt time_resolution gt Measures the fall time of the first falling edge of a waveform This is the time interval during which the instantaneous signal value decreases from the REFerence HIGH to the REFerence LOW value as shown in figure 3 2 The fall time is expressed in seconds is an alias of FALL TIME lt expected_frequency gt lt frequency_resolution gt Measures the frequency of the input signal The frequency is the inverse of the PERiod as shown in figure 3 2 The frequency is expressed in hertz No parameters Measures the HIGH value of the waveform as shown in figure 3 2 The HIGH value is the more positive of the BASE and TOP signal as defined by the standards IEC 469 and IEEE 194 The HIGH value is expressed in volts No parameters Measures the LOW value of the waveform as shown in figure 3 2 The LOW value is the less positive of the BASE and TOP signal as defined by the standards IEC 469 and IEEE 194 The LOW value is expressed in volts No parameters Measures the instantaneous voltage value of the waveform The unit of MAXimum is volt COMMAND REFERENCE 4 69 NDUTycycle NWIDth PDUTycycle PERiod PTPeak PWIDth TMAXimum No parameters Measures the MINimum instantaneous voltage value of the waveform The unit of MINimum is volt lt refere
256. out FFT ref impedance 5090 6000 digital source cursor 1 2 CHn magnify factor delta X Y ratio Cursor autosearch settings length 18 bytes autosearch cursors on off edge1 2 cursor display reference absolute relative readout Cas level cursor 1 2 Cas reference cursor 1 2 min max low high gnd abs Cas upper lower level cursor 1 2 MEASurement 1 2 settings length 10 8 bytes measurement on off slope first second source pos neg measure type dc rms peak up peak down peak to peak histogram top histogram bottom overshoot preshoot delay frequency period pulse rise time fall time duty cycle MEAS1 2 source CHn Mi j bytes 9 10 not used only applicable for MEAS1 Pass Fail test settings length 20 bytes Pft on off envelope meas1 meas2 cursor no action beep stop save source at fail start hardcopy at fail draw upper lower range Pft cursor define Pft test range type delta V V1 delta T 1 delta T greater than lower than range test Pft source destination save register Pft higher lower limit Pft vertical horizontal draw position SUMMARY OF SYSTEM SETTINGS E 3 65 66 80 81 82 96 112 128 240 MATH17 settings length 22 bytes 1 2 selection limited on off FFT filter Hamming Hanning Rectangle adjustify scale offset source1 source2 Y cursors X cursors mathematics type add subtract multiply filter integrate differentiate fast fourier histogram
257. ows that after a RST command the instrument is in the IDLE state An acquisition doesn t start until an INITiate command is received Initiation of the oscilloscope occurs by sending the INITiate IMMediate command USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 19 or by setting INITiate CONTinuous to ON The INITiate IMMediate command causes the CombiScope instrument to perform one complete acquisition cycle Upon completion of the cycle the instrument returns to the IDLE state The INItiate CONTinuous command is used to select whether the instrument is continuously initiated not When INItiate CONTinuous is set to ON the instrument immediately exits IDLE and starts an acquisition cycle On completion of each cycle the instrument does not return to the IDLE state but immediately starts another acquisition cycle Before the acquisition takes place the trigger conditions must be satisfied These conditions are programmable to suit the needs of your application as described in the next section After a RST command there are no trigger conditions to be met So an INITiate command causes the CombiScope instrument to immediately trigger the acquisition Executing the measurement instructions MEASure and READ causes the acquisition to become initiated automatically No separate INITiate commands are needed When the FETCh instruction is used the instrument must have been initiated either by a preceding INITiate IMMediate command or imp
258. petitive time amplitude trace into its power spectrum e FFT HAMMing and HANNing functions reduce the side lobes by applying a Hamming respectively Hanning window to the input signal This improves the visibility of the minor frequency components if the limited area is not accurately selected The resulting FFT trace is a MIN MAX envelope trace which means that each trace point is determined twice one for the envelope and one for the MAXimum envelope The FFT trace points are scaled between 4 and 4 divisions on the screen So the samples values that are returned as response to a TRACe query are shifted 4 divisions upwards The values of the resulting FFT trace points are between 0 dB and 80 dB This results in the following relation between screen position and sample value 3 50 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS Trace sample value Trace point 8 bits 16 bits value top 100 25600 0 dB EETA 75 19200 10 dB In 50 12800 20 dB POPE 25 6400 30 dB trace screen mid 0 0 40 dB range range pre 25 6400 50 dB IM 50 12800 60 dB 75 19200 70 Y bottom 100 25600 80 dB Figure 3 19 Relation between screen position and FFT value TRACE POINT VALUES FFT trace sample values as entered with the TRACe DATA query can be converted to FFT point value as follows e Subtract from the sample value the offset value for 4 divisions for8 bit samples 4
259. quivalent of the front panel TRIGGER MAIN TB level pp on off softkey menu 4 122 COMMAND REFERENCE TRIGger SEQuence 1 SLOPe TRIGger STARt SLOPe Syntax TRIGger SEQuence 1 SLOPe POSitive NEGative EITHer Alias TRIGger STARt SLOPe POSitive NEGative EITHer POSitive Positive trigger edge NEGative Negative trigger edge EITHer Triggering is done at a positive and at a negative edge Query form TRIGger SEQuence 1 SLOPe TRIGger STARt SLOPe Response POS NEG EITH POS Positive trigger edge NEG Negative trigger edge EITH Trigger edge is both positive and negative Description Controls the trigger edge slope to be detected The command sets the trigger slope and the query returns the trigger slope The dual slope mode EITHer is only possible if the following selections are valid the digital mode INSTrument DIGital thereal time mode SENSe SWEep REALtime ON the single shot mode INITiate CONTinuous OFF the trigger source is INTernal TRIGger SOURce INTernal1 2 3 4 After a RST command the trigger slope is POSitive COMMAND REFERENCE 4 123 Example Send CONFigure AC 2 Send SENSe SWEep REALtime ON Send TRIGger SOURce INTernal2 Send TRIGger LEVel 02 Send TRIGger SLOPe EITHer Send INITiate Send FETch AC Q2 Read lt AC RMS voltage Front panel compliance Configures AC RMS
260. r each channel is zero Coupled values The range of the offset value is directly coupled to the range of the vertical sensitivity per division SENSe VOLTage n RANGe PTPeak Example Send gt SENSe VOLTage2 RANGe OFFSet 1 1 Sets 100 mV offset for channel 2 Front panel compliance The SENSe VOLTage lt n gt RANGe OFFSet command is the remote equivalent of the front panel POS knobs 4 88 COMMAND REFERENCE SENSe VOLTage n DC RANGe PTPeak Syntax SENSe VOLTage lt n gt DC RANGe PT Peak lt NRf gt MINimum MAXimum n 11121314 Note Channel 3 not applicable for PM33x0B lt NRf gt The vertical sensitivity for channel lt n gt in peak to peak volts expressed in full scale 8 divisions MINimum Selects the minimum possible peak to peak value MAXimum Selects the maximum possible peak to peak value Query form SENSe VOLTage lt n gt DC RANGe PTPeak MINimum MAXimum Response lt NR3 gt lt NR3 gt The vertical sensitivity for channel lt n gt in peak to peak Volt expressed in full scale 8 divisions If MINimum was specified the minimum possible value is returned If MAXimum was specified the maximum possible value is returned Description Controls the vertical sensitivity for an input channel The vertical sensitivity expressed in full scale 8 divisions for channel lt n gt is set to a value of lt ptpeak gt volts If a detectable probe is attached the lt ptpea
261. r of times that a data point of the incoming trace is within a particular amplitude belt Since there are 512 histogram points there are also 512 amplitude belts The range of the amplitude belts is determined by the selected peak to peak range SENSe VOLTage RANGe PTPeak and is expressed by the following equation amplitude belt peak to peak range 512 Notice that a histogram contains 512 valid data points The number of points TRACe POINts of the trace memory location where the histogram is stored may exceed this value In that case the values of the trace positions above 512 have to be ignored The histogram is displayed on the screen in the area between 3 and 2 divisions vertically and between the third and the seventh division horizontally The horizontal axis represents the amplitude in volts The vertical axis represents the number of occurrences of an amplitude in percents PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate TRANsform HISTogram STATe ON 1 This turns the histogram function on 3 9 6 Frequency filtering FiLTer function performs digital low pass filtering to suppress undesired frequency noise The width of the filter window can be programmed from 3 to 41 points in increments of 2 points After a RST command the number of points is 19 PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate FILTer FREQuency POINts 35 1 35 filter points CALL Send 0 8 CALCulate FILTer FREQuency STATe ON 1 Filter C
262. r which no remote commands are available i e to match a front panel setup 3 4 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS Trade off This way of programming is cumbersome and tricky because additional information on the front panel display is not always available remotely Example DISPlay MENU TRIGger Activates the TRIGGER softkey menu SYSTem KEY 4 Simulates the pressing of softkey 4 The effect is that TRIGGER menu option noise is switched on or off 3 2 1 Measurement instructions This is a completely new approach in the remote operation of programmable instruments which provides a set of task oriented measurement instructions Rather than programming every instrument setting separately with starting the acquisition and calculating the result just specify the desired signal characteristic and the CombiScope instrument returns the requested result Depending upon the actual available signal your CombiScope instrument automatically determines the optimal settings to acquire and calculate the requested result An example of such a command is the MEASure FREQuency query which not only works on oscilloscopes but also on different types of SCPI compatible instruments such as counters and multimeters With traditional oscilloscopes you had to do the following Setup all functions of the oscilloscope separately Start the acquisition of the data position the cursor markers calculate the frequency from the acquired dat
263. ration event enable 4 90 Operation event 4 90 Operation event 3 73 4 16 OPERatioti stat s Liu kiere ue E carter taper 3 70 3 71 4 27 OPTIONS peu atas pase 5 RP RS Ri E RAN ROS 2 4 4 21 Output queue 3 70 4 20 4 24 4 27 Overlapped 6 4 14 OQverload 50Q 2 PLA DETUR E 3 72 Oversampling Acacia estet dede ROG BERE MA 3 43 Oversho0ot esc ees ve oen Rei 3 62 1 8 INDEX P PAGING s supe pct Rr ne Rn xt eed cur 4 99 PAL 0 uobis ever lere 3 24 4 129 4 5 4 43 4 54 4 67 4 74 ERE ERU EDS RUE 4 99 Pass Fall er SR RR E e vale ee 3 81 A 10 B 22 Pass Fall sStat s ei eei bm aes 3 71 Pass Fall test deme ewe Reis 4 105 Peak detection 3 43 4 24 4 60 4 81 B 22 3 40 4 69 4 88 28 dioe d Mp Sata 4 69 25 phase ae ep ee ges epee E DES 3 63 ode
264. re specified elsewhere They are placed between the signs Example Boolean means a boolean value Terminal symbols Terminal symbols consist of a sequence of literals that use the standard ASCII character set Any ASCII symbol that is not a meta symbol or a non terminal symbol is considered to be a literal 4 2 COMMAND REFERENCE Notes 1 A message that is specified as a sequency of literals can be sent to the instrument in any upper or lower case combination The case of the characters has no semantical meaning 2 Upper and lower case characters in a syntax specification are used to distinguish between the short and long form of a mnemonic Upper case specifies the mandatory short form of a mnemonic The lower case characters specify the remaining part of the optional long form 3 Literals that are non printable ASCII characters are underlined For example the symbol NL is used to specify the New Line character hexadecimal 4 Some syntax specifications use the control symbol The characters that follow this symbol specify a special message that is concurrently sent with the preceding data byte For example NL End specifies that the NL code is sent concurrently with the End message via the EOI line of the GPIB interface META SYMBOL MEANING EXPLANATION Is defined to be Specifies equality Example manufacturer FLUKE Alternative Specifies an either or choice Example result 0
265. requency AC coupling causes the signal to be passed from ERR 10 Hz to the full bandwidth frequency dB precedence MC COUPLING 60 1 00 200 MHz 10Hz FULL BANDWIDTH FREQ Figure 3 5 Coupling PROGRAM EXAMPLE Select AC coupling on input signal channel 3 SENSe FUNCtion ON XTIMe VOLTage3 Sets CH3 on INPut3 COUPling AC Sets CH3 input signal AC coupled TRIGger SOURce INTernal3 Sets trigger source 2 CH3 Select AC coupling triggering TRIGger FILTer LPASs STATe ON Sets Low Pass filter on cutoff frequency 0 Hz this selects MTB trigger DC coupling TRIGger FILTer LPASs FREQuency 10 Sets cutoff frequency 10 Hz this selects MTB trigger AC coupling USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 23 LF REJECT 30 KHz cutoff frequency LF REJECT LF reject HF passed causes the signal to be passed from the cutoff frequency 30 KHz to the full bandwidth frequency 60 100 200 MHz 30kHz FULL BANDWIDTH FREQ Figure 3 6 LF Reject PROGRAM EXAMPLE TRIGger FILTer LPASs STATe ON Sets Low Pass filter on cutoff frequency 0 Hz DC coupling TRIGger FILTer LPASs FREQuency 3E 4 Sets cutoff frequency 30 KHz this selects MTB trigger LF reject HF REJECT 30 KHz cutoff frequency HF REJECT HF reject LF passed causes the signal to be E passed from 0 Hz to the cutoff frequency 30 2 30kHz FULL BANDWIDTH Figure 3 7 HF Reje
266. rument 3 8 3 6 3 13 3 78 4 105 A 6 A 10 la M MED 4 4 IN T egral elucet Soe mae tha wees 3 46 3 48 4 35 B 21 Integrate sien ec vex ER end B 21 1 6 INDEX Internal 4 22 4 24 4 25 C UR NM FORK PE rm B 17 Inverted 3 40 4 65 K Key number erite reir iere VET ERE M RA hr 4 102 L Level 3 20 4 120 B 26 LE rejects en dro ER eee 3 23 4 116 4 117 4 118 B 26 Line voltage b AD xum bee RE 3 20 Lines per frame 3 24 4 129 4 132 Lines trigger eol ET RUEDA EUER NEW eee 3 24 4 127 B 27 ERS hal Sia irate utate ofc AX reis e fuss datu 4 2 Local sState x4 sv tuia iu oda NP E BI PY Edu 4 97 Logic 0 3 20 3 81 4 126 B 21 FONG fiat he hs 4 2 LOW iue ee e em arca 3 11 3 62 4 67 4 68 4 70 4 72 4 73 Low frequency reject 3 21 LOW level 5 eos RR ea RR Rd PC CAES IC Se a B 28 L OWe CaSG iu uve au em t os Verde 4 2 LOW PASS gt Ged a 3 21 3 40 3
267. s nr of samples Note Refer to section 3 4 3 Conversion of trace data about how to convert this string data 2 8 GETTING STARTED WITH SCPI PROGRAMMING 2 4 2 How to acquire repetitive traces In the program example 5 trace acquisitions of 512 16 bit samples are done via a probe connected to channel 2 The trace sample bytes are read from the GPIB as string characters and written to the file TRACE5 DAT on the hard disk PREPARATIONS e Connect a probe from the Probe Adjust signal to channel 2 PROGRAM EXAMPLE okk ke e Acquire 5 sequential traces and store in file TRACE5 DAT okk xk DIM tracebuf AS STRING 1050 CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Resets the instrument After RST a trace acquisition is defined at 512 samples of 16 bits 2 bytes CALL Send 0 8 CONFigure AC 2 1 Configures channel 2 CALL Send 0 8 SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe VOLTage2 1 Switches channel 2 on OPEN O 4 41 TRACE5 DAT Opens file TRACE5 DAT FOR i 1 TO 5 CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 Single initiation CALL Send 0 8 amp 4WAI TRACe CH2 1 Queries for channel 2 trace Notice the WAI before TRACe The WAI command takes care that the TRACe CH2 command is executed when the INITiate command is finished CALL Receive 0 8 tracebuf 256 Reads channel 2 trace PRINT 41 Trace buffer i Writes trace header to file PRINT 41 LEFT tracebuf IBCNT Writes trace buffer to file NE
268. s Byte Register Example Send CLS Clears the status data COMMAND REFERENCE 4 17 Event Status Enable Syntax ESE numeric data Query form ESE Response integer Description The command sets and the query reports the contents of the standard Event Status Enable register ESE The range of the 8 bit ESE contents is between 0 and 255 decimal The contents of the standard Event Status Enable ESE register determine which bits in the standard Event Status Register ESR are enabled to be summarized in the Status byte Register STB The contents of the standard ESE register are cleared at Power on Example Send ESE 17 Enables the EXE Execution Error and the OPC Oper ation Complete bits to be summarized in the Status Byte Register Alternative commands ESE B10001 and ESE H11 Send Read lt 17 The bits 4 EXE bit and 0 bit are set 4 18 COMMAND REFERENCE ESR Event Status Register Syntax ESR Response lt integer gt Description The ESR query reports the contents of the standard Event Status Register ESR and clears it The range of the 8 bit ESR contents is between 0 and 255 decimal PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC 7161514132 1 0 ESR The meaning of the bits is as follows e bit 7 PON Power ON bit 6 User Request e e bit 5 Command Error e Dit 4 EXE Execution Err
269. s command is the remote equivalent of the front panel TRACE INTENSITY knob 4 46 COMMAND REFERENCE DISPlay MENU NAME Syntax DISPlay MENU NAME character data character data FRONT PANEL SOFTKEY NAME TBMode TB MODE main time base TRIGger TRIGGER DMODe DTB delayed time base SETups SETUPS CURSors CURSORS ACQuire ACQUIRE DISPlay DISPLAY MATH MATH MEASure MEASURE SAVE SAVE RECall RECALL UTIL UTILITY VERTical VERT MENU Description The DISPIay MENU command can be used to select a softkey menu by specifying a predefined name Additionally the display of the softkey menu field is switched ON So the execution of the DISPlay MENU command is coupled to the execution of the DISPlay MENU STATe ON command The menus ACQuire DISPlay MATH MEASure SAVE and RECall are available in the digital mode If they are specified in the analog mode error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated After a RST command the mode is set at TBMode without display of the TB MODE softkey menu field Example Send DISPlay MENU TBMode Selects and displays the TB MODE softkey menu Front panel compliance The DISPlay MENU command is the remote equivalent of the front panel menu buttons TB MODE TRIGGER DTB SETUPS CURSORS ACQUIRE DISPLAY MATH MEASURE SAVE RECALL UTILITY and VERT MENU COMMAND REFERENCE 4 47 DISPlay MENU STATe Syntax DISPlay MENU STATe Boolean Query for
270. s in the queue error description short description of the error When there are no errors in the queue the description is No error Description The STATus QUEue query reports the next event from the error event queue and removes this event from the queue The error queue is a First In First Out FIFO queue Therefore the error query returns the oldest error Once an error is read it is removed from the queue and the next error message is made available STATus QUEue is the alias of the SYSTem ERRor query If the queue is empty the instrument responds with 0 error The error event queue has space for 20 messages If there are more messages than the queue can hold it will overflow The oldest messages stay in the queue but the most recent message is discarded and the latest message is written in its place When the event error queue overflows the last position in the queue is set to 350 Queue overflow The error event queue is cleared e After power on e When CLS is received e When the last error in the queue is read Example Send STATus QUEue Read lt 222 Data out of range The error number is 222 and the meaning is Data out of range 4 96 COMMAND REFERENCE SYSTem BEEPer SYSTem BEEPer STATe Syntax SYSTem BEEPer SYSTem BEEPer STATe Boolean Query form SYSTem BEEPer STATe Response 0 1 0 disabled 1 Beeper enabled Description The SYST
271. s made available SYSTem ERRor is the alias of the STATus QUEue query If the queue is empty the instrument responds with 0 error The error event queue has space for 20 messages If there are more messages than the queue can hold it will overflow The oldest messages stay in the queue but the most recent message is discarded and the latest message is written in its place When the event error queue overflows the last position in the queue is set to 350 Queue overflow The error event queue is cleared e After power on e When CLS is received e When the last error in the queue is read Example Send SYSTem ERRor Read lt 222 Data out of range The error number is 222 and the meaning is Data out of range 4 102 COMMAND REFERENCE SYSTem KEY Syntax SYSTem KEY NRf MINimum MAXimum lt NRf gt Reference number to a key 1 2 3 4 5 6 softkey 1 top to softkey 6 bottom 101 102 103 etc top row of keys left to right 801 802 803 etc bottom row of keys left to right MINimum Specifies the smallest key number MAXimum Specifies the largest key number Query form SYSTem KEY MINimum MAXimum Response lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt Reference number of the last key for which pressing was simulated If MINimum was specified the minimum possible key number is returned If MAXimum was specified the maximum possible key number is returned Description The SYSTe
272. s sent first followed by the least significant byte Isb The sample values that are sent in the block are coded according to the two s complement notation The relation between the screen positions the values of the trace samples and the decimal value of the corresponding binary codes is shown in the figure below Screen Trace sample Decimal value position Ps value Ts of byte code 32767 127 32767 127 25600100 25600 100 screen mial 0 0 0 trace range range 65535 255 n NI PETAT 25600 100 7 39936 156 bottom H32768 128 2 32768 128 Note Numbers between parenthesis apply to single byte format Figure 3 11 Relation between screen position and trace value The value of the trace points relate to the vertical position of the corresponding sample on the screen of the CombiScope instrument As the figure above shows the sample with value 25600 corresponds with the top position of the screen Similarly the samples with values 25600 and 0 correspond to the bottom and mid position respectively This applies to trace samples that are formatted to consist of 16 bits 2 bytes The values that apply to the 8 bit 1 byte format are placed between parenthesis The ADC allows trace acquisitions that are somewhat outside the vertical screen boundaries Trace acquisitions use the full dynamic range of the ADC This results in a dynam
273. s string data CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT STATe ON 1 Enables display of text CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT DATA Remote control 1 Displays the text Remote control on the screen of your CombiS cope instrument PROGRAM EXAMPLE 2 text as block data CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT CLEar 1 Clears the text CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay WINDow2 TEXT DATA 01 25 0O Displays 1 25 CALL Send 0 8 CHR 25 0 Displays Q CALL Send 0 8 CH1 1 Displays CH1 Displays the text 1 25 kW CH1 on the screen of your CombiS cope instrument Note ASCII character 25 is displayed as on the screen of your CombiScope instrument 3 11 2 3 Selection of softkey menus The DISPlay MENU commands allow you to select and enable the display of a softkey menu If a menu is selected via the DISPlay MENU command the display is automatically enabled After RST command the display of softkey menus is turned off PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay MENU CURSors 1 Selects and displays the CURSORS menu CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay MENU STATe OFF 1 Switches the CURSORS menu display off 3 66 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 12 Print Plot Functions The HCOPy DEVice TYPE command allows you to select a hardcopy device The following selections can be made DEVICE TYPE NOTE Plotter HPGL HPGL plot data format Plotter HP7440 Plotter H
274. sure and print the AC RMS peak to peak and amplitude of the signal on channel 1 okk kk x response SPACES 30 CALL Send 0 8 MEASure AC 1 1 Measures the AC RMS value CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the AC RMS value PRINT AC RMS value LEFT response IBCNT 1 CALL Send 0 8 FETCh PTPeak 1 Fetches the Peak To P eak value CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the PTP value PRINT Peak To Peak value LEFT response IBCNT 1 CALL Send 0 8 FETCh AMPLitude 1 Fetches the amplitude value CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the amplitude value PRINT Amplitude value LEFT response IBCNT S 1 2 5 2 How to make repeated measurements The measurement instructions allow you to make repeated measurements The CONFigure command allows you to configure the instrument the READ query allows you to make a measurement and the FETCh query allows you to fetch more signal characteristics PROGRAM EXAMPLE okk kk Measure and print 5x the AC RMS peak to peak and amplitude of the signal on channel 1 KKKKK response SPACES 30 CALL Send 0 8 CONFigure AC 1 1 Configures for AC RMS FOR 1 TO 5 Performs 5 measurements CALL Send 0 8 READ AC 1 Initiates AC RMS reading CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Reads the AC RMS value PRINT AC RMS LEFT response 1 CALL Send 0 8 FETCh PTPeak
275. t of the FETCh query header is defaulted the characteristic as specified by the last executed FETCh READ or MEASure query is returned When such a query is not executed since the last power on cycle the measure function VOLTage DC is assumed by the oscilloscope The default VOLTage node specifies that the requested characteristic relates to the voltage component of the signal For example the rise time or the frequency of the voltage Restrictions 1 A FETCh query may be executed only when the oscilloscope is in the digital mode INStrument SELect DIGital The digital mode is selected after RST Executing this query when the instrument is in the analog mode generates execution error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required 2 FETCh query may not operate on a TRACe memory element that has been modified since the last executed INItiate IMMediate READ or MEASure command Otherwise execution error 230 Data corrupt or stale is generated 4 56 COMMAND REFERENCE Example 1 Send MEASure VOLTage AC 0 6 2 Measures AC RMS on channel 2 expected voltage 600 mV Read lt the measured AC RMS value Send FETCh DC 02 Fetches the DC component Read lt the measured DC component Send FETCh AMPLitude 82 Fetches the waveform amplitude Read the measured amplitude Example 2 Send gt CONFigure AC Configures for AC RMS Send TRIGger SOURce BUS Tr
276. tatus Register ESR will never be set Neither the response to an OPC query will be generated which causes a hang up of the CombiScope when the response is read e After receiving one of the commands INITiate or INITiate CONTinuous the oscilloscope checks the following RST trigger settings e X deflection OFF Deld TB OFF Trigger Edge Level PP OFF XvsY OFF Roll mode OFF e Event delay OFF digital mode Peak detection OFF In case of a settings conflict the command is ignored and error 221 Settings conflict is reported To avoid this first send a RST command before sending an INITiate command Example Send gt RST Resets the instrument Send CONFigure AC Q1 Configures for AC channel 1 Send INITiate CONTinuous ON Continuous initiation Send gt FETCh AC Fetches AC RMS value Read AC RMS voltage Reads AC RMS voltage COMMAND REFERENCE 4 61 INITiate IMMediate Syntax INITiate IMMediate Description This command causes the trigger system to be initiated once only i e initiates one acquisition cycle The actual acquisition starts when all trigger conditions have been met After the acquisition has completed the trigger system returns to the IDLE state Note OPERation status bits 3 SWEeping and 5 Waiting for TRIGger are valid when INITiate CONTinuous is OFF and the trigger mode is single shot TB MODE single the trigger mode is multiple shot TB
277. tatus byte register STB If a bit is 1 in the enable register and its associated event bit transition is true a positive transition occurs in the operation summary bit After power on the enable mask is set to 0 The STATus OPERation query reports and clears the contents of the operation event register Reading an event register has the effect of clearing its contents The decimal value that is returned is the summation of the decimal value bit weight of the individual bits that have been set After power on the contents of the event register is cleared The STATus OPERation NTRansition command sets the contents of the negative transition filter of the operation register structure The negative transition filter specifies which bits in the operation condition register that make a negative transition 1 gt 0 set the corresponding bit in the operation event register For example when you set bit 2 in this filter it will set bit 2 in the operation event register at the time bit 2 in the operation condition register is reset changed from 1 to 0 After power on the contents of the negative transition filter is set to 0000 COMMAND REFERENCE 4 91 The STATus OPERation PTRansition command sets the contents of the positive transition filter of the operation register structure The positive transition filter specifies which bits in the operation condition register that make a positive transition 0 gt 1 set the correspondi
278. ted by the front panel MEAS1 and 52 features during a single shot measurement Application summary e Configure for measuring AC RMS by sending CONFigure AC and initiate a single shot by sending INITiate e Then stop program execution to let you select the following MEAS values via the front panel gt MEAS 1 volt dc MEAS2 time frequency e After printing the read measurement values stop program execution again to let you select the following MEAS values via the front panel gt MEAS 1 volt rms MEAS2 time period Application program Note program is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPA13 BAS A 2 Acquiring Waveform Traces In the following example a channel 1 trace of maximum 4096 samples of 1 or 2 bytes is read converted to voltage values and printed in portions of 90 samples Application summary e Read the channel 1 trace by sending TRACe CH1 e Convert the binary trace samples to integer values refer to section 3 4 3 1 and 3 4 3 2 e Read the peak to peak range by sending SENSe VOLTage RANGe PTPeak e Read the offset voltage by sending SENSe VOLTage RANGe OFFSet e Convert the integer values to voltage values refer to section 3 4 3 3 and print them in portions of 90 samples Application program Note The program is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPA2 BAS 6 APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES A 3 Saving Recalling Instrument Setups The following examples use the save recall fe
279. th MEAS ure P WIDth EAS ure RIS E TIME MEAS ure FALL TIME MEAS ure NDUTycycle MEAS ure P DUTycycle MEAS ure TMAXimum MEAS ure TMINimum Note MEASure can be substituted by CONFigure READ or by CONFigure INITiate FETCh TOUCH HOLD amp MEASURE key UTILITY menu UTILITY PROBE softkeys n 1 6 SYSTem KEY 104 DISPlay MENU UTIL SYSTem KEY n Trace handling trace length number of points trace point length trace data trace copy TRACe P OINts FORMat DATA TRACe COPY 26 CROSS REFERENCES FUNCTION KEYS MENUS TRIGGERING OF SWEEPS send GET code aborttrigger system initiate trigger system continuously initiate trigger system once only RELATED SCPI COMMAND S xTRG ABORt INITiate CONTinuous INITiate IMM ediate TRIGGER COUPLING key TRIGGER key DTB menu TRIGGER menu DTB softkeys n 1 6 SYSTem KEY 209 SYSTem KEY 402 DISPlay MENU TRIGger DISPlay MENU DMODe SYSTem KEY n TRIGGER DEL D TB key DTB SYSTem KEY 402 menu DTB DISPlay MENU DMODe softkeysn 1 6 SYSTem KEY n TRIGGER LEVEL knob TRIGGER LEVEL TRIGger LEVel key TRIGGER ac dc If reject hfreject key DTB menu TRIGGER level peak peak menu DTB softkeys n 1 6 SYSTem KEY 409 TRIGger FiLTer LPASs F REQuency TRIGger FILTer LPASs STATe TRIGger FILTer HPASS F RE Quency TRIGger FILTer HPASs S TATe SYSTem KEY
280. the four concepts has it own benefits and trade offs 1 Using measurement instructions Advantage Trade off Example Easy to program No instrument knowledge required to make measurements So you can start programming quickly and get measurement results rightaway A measurement takes some time to complete because the instrument automatically searches for optimal settings MEASure FREQuency Measures the frequency of the signal at channel 1 Single function programming using the instrument model Advantage Trade off Example Allows you to program individual functions separately through single commands The instrument model gives the relation between the commands and the functions of the CombiScope instrument Requires understanding of the remote operation of the instrument functions TRACe CH1 Returns the acquisition trace of the signal at channel 1 Programming the complete instrument setup Advantage Trade off Example Simple to program No worry about individual settings This method can also be used to save and recall settings which are not individually programmable Processes complete instrument setups Individual settings must be set or programmed separately SAV 3 Saves actual instrument settings to internal memory 3 RCL 3 Recalls instrument settings from internal memory 3 Programming through front panel simulation Advantage Gives the possibility to program settings fo
281. the parameter specification is assumed to be the value at the BNC input of the oscilloscope When a detectable probe is attached it is assumed to be the value at the probe tip When the lt expected voltage gt parameter is defaulted the oscilloscope performs an autorange which needs some additional time When a particular value was specified instead the oscilloscope immediately selects the range next higher to the specified voltage omitting the relative time consuming autoranging Notice that when voltage parameters are used the VOLtage node must be sent explicitly in the command header Or in other words when the VOLTage node is defaulted the voltage parameters must also be defaulted 3 10 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS Examples MEASure AMPLitude This query measures the amplitude of a waveform at the default input channel 1 After the acquisition the resulting amplitude is returned MEASure VOLTage AMPLitude 10 2 This query measures the amplitude of a signal at channel 2 2 But since it specifies the expected voltage value 10 volts it will complete the measurement faster In a similar way the measure function parameters provide the oscilloscope with information about the signal characteristic to be measured The parameters that are allowed depend upon the requested signal characteristic measure function The measure function parameters that specify a voltage characteristic such as AC AMPLitude H
282. the screen of the oscilloscope As this causes the front panel simulation method to be a tedious process it is certainly not recommended as a common programming practice For example the SYSTem KEY 507 command switches the AVERAGE function on when it was switched off before When this function was switched on before the AVERAGE function is switched off The effect of the SYSTem KEY command completely depends upon the state of the instrument at the moment the command is received In a remote programming environment it is not immediately clear whether a state is on or off For that reason the command SENSe AVERage ON is much better To select functions that cannot be programmed directly you might use the front panel simulation commands For example the command SYSTem KEY 4 switches the noise suppression option in the TRIGGER menu of the front panel ON or OFF 3 8 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 3 Measuring Signal Characteristics As explained in section 3 2 1 Measurement instructions the measurement instruction set is a new approach in the remote operation of programmable instruments This instruction set allows you to request a particular characteristic of the input signal The CombiScope instrument then chooses the best possible settings executes the requested task and returns the desired result Within the measurement instruction set different programming levels can be distinguished The highest level is the easiest to use
283. to LF Numeric format Negative Transition Filter Negative Transition Register National Television System Committee Operation Complete Operation Optional Oscilloscope Phase Alternating Line program header separator program message terminator program message unit Power ON Parallel Poll Positive Transition Filter Positive Transition Register Questionable MANUAL CONVENTIONS 3 RL rms rmt rmu RQC Ras RST rtl SAV SCPI SDC SECAM SH SPD SPE SRE SR Q STB Std T T amp M TRG TST TTL UNL UNT URQ WAI Random Access Memory Recall Remote Enable Remote Local root mean square response message terminator response message unit Request Control Request Service Reset return to local Save Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Selected Device Clear Sequentielle Couleurs M moire Source Handshake Serial Poll Disable Serial Poll Enable Service Request Enable Service Request Status Byte Standard Talker Test amp Measurement Trigger Test Transistor Transistor Logic Unlisten Untalk User Request Wait to continue C 4 MANUAL CONVENTIONS C 2 Glossary of Symbols Used uV dB dBm dBuV Vrms Hz m Mbyte ms mw s micro voltage 1E 6 decibell decibell with respect to 1 mW decibell with respect to 1 UV RMS
284. tory file_name Sends the SYSTem SET query and reads in response the lt setupin gt instrument setup Writes the instrument settings lt setupin gt to the file specified Application program Note program is supplied on floppy under file name EXAPPA32 BAS APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES A 9 A 4 Making a Hardcopy of the Screen In the following example a hardcopy of the screen picture is made as follows 1 Enter the hardcopy of the screen in HPGL data format 2 Send the entered data buffer to a HPGL plotter connected via the IEEE bus Application summary CombiScope IEEE computer plotter instrument e Connect the HPGL plotter to the computer via the GPIB interface e Turn off the power of the HPGL plotter to prevent the plotter from starting to plot during the data transport from the CombiScope instrument to the computer e Create the picture waveforms text on the screen that you want to hardcopy to the plotter The CombiScope instrument must be in its digital mode DSO e Select the hardcopy HPGL format by sending HCOPy DEVice HPGL e Enter the hardcopy HPGL data by sending HCOPy DATA and by reading the response data i e 0 lt data e Stop program execution to let you turn on the power of the HPGL plotter e Finally send the HPGL hardcopy data to the HPGL plotter As a result the picture of the scr
285. trace name A trace name which is a predefined acquisition trace or memory trace acquisition trace CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 memory trace Mi_1 Mi_2 Mi_3 Mi_4 Note 1 8 standard memory i 9 50 extended memory Query form CALCulate lt n gt FEED Response CHn Mi n Note n21 4 1 2 for PM33x0B i21 8 standard memory 9 50 extended memory Description The CALCulate FEED command controls the source for the calculate function The trace specified by trace name is selected as source for the calculate block After a RST command CH1 becomes the source for the CALCulate1 and CALCulate2 functions Limitations A channel must be ON before it can be selected An empty trace may not be used as source in a CALCulate command M1 iis not allowed as source for a CALCulate1 command M2 iis not allowed as source for a CALCulate2 command Example Send gt CALCulate2 FEED CH3 Channel3 becomes the source for MATH2 Send CALCulate FEED 8 4 8 4 becomes the source for MATH1 Front panel compliance The CALCulate1 and CALCulate2 commands use the MATH1 and MATH2 features of the CombiScope instrument 4 34 COMMAND REFERENCE CALCulate n FILTer GATE FREQuency POINts CALCulate n FILTer GATE FREQuency STATe Syntax CALOulate n FILTer GATE FREQuency POINts numeric data MAXimum MINimum CALOulate n FILTer G
286. tring of this example will be as follows 3514 8 byte 1 gt byte 512 checksum lt 10 gt lt 10 gt is terminating LF nr of digits VAL MID response 2 1 nr of bytes VAL MID response 3 nr of digits 2 PRINT Number of trace bytes nr of bytes sample length ASC MID response 3 nr of digits 1 nr of samples nr of bytes sample length 8 PRINT Number of trace samples nr of samples FOR 1 TO nr of samples trace i ASC MID response i 3 nr of digits 1 IF trace i 127 THEN trace i trace i 256 END IF NEXT i USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 33 3 4 8 2 Conversion of 16 bit samples to integer As an example a conversion of a trace of 512 16 bit samples is shown The format is as follows trace bytes 41026 lt 16 gt lt msb 1 Isb 1 gt msb 512 Isb 512 checksum NL trace sample 512 trace sample 1 byte with decimal value 16 number of trace bytes 1026 number of digits of 1026 PROGRAM EXAMPLE In this example a trace acquisition of 2 byte samples is done Thereafter the trace data is read and converted to integer samples in the array trace and the number of trace bytes samples is printed The conversion from double byte byte1 msb and byte2 Isb to integer is done as follows refer to figure 3 12 If byte1 lt 128 then integer byte1 256 byte2 If byte1
287. ts 3 3 3 2 1 Measurement instructions 3 4 3 2 2 Single function programming using the instrument model 3 5 3 2 8 Instrumentsetup 3 6 3 2 4 Front panel simulation 3 7 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 Measuring Signal 3 8 3 3 1 The MEASure query 3 8 3 3 2 Benefits of using parameters 3 9 3 3 3 Waveform measurements 3 11 3 3 4 Customizing settings 3 13 3 3 5 Multiple measurements 3 14 3 3 6 Multiple characteristics from a single acquisition 3 15 3 3 7 Trigger control via 3 16 3 3 8 Fetching characteristics from memory traces 3 17 ACQUISITION 22 3 18 3 4 4 Acquisition control 3 18 3 4 1 1 Triggetinig s vost ye RS cnc d 3 20 3 4 1 2 Video triggering 4 3 23 3 41 3 The trigger modes 3 25 3 4 1 4 Pre and post triggering 3 27 3 4 1 5 External triggering 3 28 3 4 2 Reading trace acquisitions 3 29 3 4 2 1 Single shot acquisition
288. ty After a RST command video line number 1 and signal polarity POSitive are selected Example Send TRIGger TYPE VIDeo Selects TV video triggering Send TRIGger VIDeo LINE 123 Selects video line number 123 Send TRIGger VIDeo SSIGnal NEGative Selects negative video signal polarity Front panel compliance The TRIGger VIDeo LINE command is the remote equivalent of the front panel TRIGGER MAIN TB LINE NBR softkey menu The TRIGger VIDeo SSIGnal command is the remote equivalent of the front panel TRIGGER MAIN TB pos neg softkey menu APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES A 1 APPENDIX A APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPLES The program examples are written for the CombiScopes with the IEEE option installed No other instrument is required to execute these examples For system and programming environment requirements to execute these examples refer to section 2 1 Preparations for SCPI programming A 1 Measuring Signal Characteristics A 1 1 Making automatic measurements A 1 2 Making programmed measurements A 1 3 Reading measurement values A 2 Acquiring Waveform Traces A 3 Saving Recalling Instrument Setups A 3 1 settings to from internal memory A 3 2 Save recall settings to from computer disk memory A 4 Making a Hardcopy of the Screen A 5 Pass Fail Testing A 5 1 Saving a pass fail test setup A 5 2 Restoring a pass fail test setup A 5 3 Running a pass fail test Note All APPLICATION PROGRAM EXAMPL
289. ulate the pressing of one of the softkeys 1 to 6 PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Resets the instrument CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay MENU UTIL 1 Enables the UTILITY softkey menu CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem KEY 2 KEY 5 KEY 4 1 Selects the PROBE PROBE CORR 10 1 options CALL Send 0 8 DISPlay MENU STATe OFF 1 Disables the UTILITY softkey menu n this example the probe correction factor for input channel 1 is set at 10 1 via softkey menu UTILITY USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 81 3 18 Functions not Directly Programmable Not all front panel functions are individually programmable with SCPI commands However the SYSTem SET and SAV RCL commands can be used to access the following functions Cursor functions see CURSORS menu appendix B 2 2 Logic Triggering see TRIGGER menu appendix B 2 10 Event functions see TB MODE menu appendix B 2 9 DTB functions see DTB DEL D TB menu appendix B 2 6 Xpos see X POS button Display menu functions see DISPLAY menu appendix B 2 3 Pass Fail functions see MATHPLUS MATH menu appendix A5 and B 2 4 Other functions and keys that are not individually programmable with SCPI commands are accessible using the SYSTem KEY command They Roll mode DISPlay MENU TBMode SYSTem KEY 3 toggles on off Trigger noise DISPlay MENU TRIGger SYSTem KEY 4 toggles on off TEXT OFF key SYSTem KEY 801 selects next option STATUS key SYSTem KEY 2
290. ure AC 2 1 Configures for channel 2 CALL Send 0 8 SENSe FUNCtion XTIMe VOLTage2 1 Switches channel 2 on CALL Send 0 8 INITiate 1 Single initiation CALL Send 0 8 TRACe COPY 1 2 CH2 1 Copies CH2 trace to M1 2 Now trace area 2 of memory register 1 is filled with the channel 2 trace CALL Send 0 8 FETCh AC 1 2 1 Fetches AC RMS of M1 2 CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Enters AC RMS value PRINT AC RMS value response Prints AC RMS value CALL Send 0 8 FETCh PTPeak 8 1 2 1 Fetches Peak To Peak of M1 2 CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Enters Peak To Peak value PRINT Peak To Peak value response Prints Peak peak value CALL Send 0 8 FETCh AMPLitude 1 2 1 Fetches amplitude of M1 2 CALL Receive 0 8 response 256 Enters amplitude value PRINT Amplitude value response Prints amplitude value 3 18 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 4 Acquisition 3 4 4 Acquisition control Several commands exist to control the acquisition process The following diagram shows the possible states of the acquisition process and the way they are affected by commands IDLE state RST ABORt power on or Yes INITiated state Wait for TRIGger state Y Acquisition 2 5 5 7186 Figure 8 3 Trigger Model for acquisitions The trigger model sh
291. utes 59 seconds 4 108 COMMAND REFERENCE SYSTem VERSion Syntax SYSTem VERSion Response YYYY V YYYY The year number of the SCPI version V The approved revision number within the year Description Reports the version of the SCPI command set to which your instrument complies The year and revision number within that year is returned e g 1992 0 The RST command doesn t change the current SCPI version Example Send SYSTem VERSion Read lt 1992 0 COMMAND REFERENCE 4 109 TRACe COPY Syntax TRACe COPY destination trace source trace Alias DATA COPY destination trace source trace source trace CHn Mi n destination trace Mi n 21 4 i21 8 standard memory i 1 50 extended memory Description Copies a trace from one trace memory source to another destination The contents of the source trace is copied to the destination trace The trace administration data is copied as well If the oscilloscope is in the analog mode error 221 Settings conflict Digital mode required is generated Note If the source trace is being built the copy action takes place after completion of the source trace Limitations For the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments CH3 is not applicable the external trigger view channel so EXTernal is the alias for Mi E is the alias for Mi 4 Example Send RST Resets the instrument S
292. values referto the RST command in the command reference 3 16 2 to save restore a setup via instrument memory Complete instrument setups can be stored and recalled via one of the internal memories of the CombiScope instrument The settings in recall memory 0 are the initial settings The settings in the recall memories 1 through 10 are user programmable PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 SAV 3 1 Saves the complete instrument setup into memory 3 CALL Send 0 8 RCL 3 1 Recalls the complete instrument setup from memory 3 3 16 3 How to save restore a setup via the GPIB controller Complete instrument setups or a part of the setup node can be stored and recalled via the external memory of the controller using the SYSTem SET node query store setup and SYSTem SET command recall setup PROGRAM EXAMPLE DIM settings AS STRING 350 Reserves space for instrument settings CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem SET 1 Queries for the complete instrument setup no node parameter specified CALL Receive 0 8 settings 256 Reads the instrument settings length IBCNT number of settings bytes CALL Send 0 8 SYSTem SET 0 Sends the command header note the space EOI checking disabled 0 CALL Send 0 8 LEFT settings length 1 Sends the instrument settings checking enabled 1 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 79 3 17 Front Panel Simulation The use o
293. ves the current instrument settings into one of the internal memory registers 1 10 The settings in memory register 0 are standard settings which can only be recalled The settings in the memory registers 0 through 10 can be recalled by sending the RCL command Example Send gt SAV 2 Stores the actual instrument settings into memory register 2 Send RCL 2 Restores the instrument settings from memory register 2 Front panel compliance The SAV RCL commands are the remote equivalent of the front panel softkey operation via the SETUPS RECALL menu The standard settings stored in memory 0 can be changed via the front panel FRONT SETUPS menu 4 26 COMMAND REFERENCE SRE Service Request Enable Syntax SRE numeric data Query form SRE Response integer Description The command sets and the query reports the contents of the Service Request Enable SRE register The range of the 8 bit ES R contents is between 0 and 255 decimal However bit 6 value 64 is ignored and will always be reported zero Therefore the real range is from 0 to 63 and from 128 to 191 The bits in the Service Request Enable Register SRE determine the following e Which corresponding bits in the Status Byte register STB cause a service request from the instrument e Which corresponding bits in the Status Byte register STB are summarized in the MSS bit in the STB register RQS read by Serial Poll Service
294. ween the STATe node and the ON parameter This message is sent as INPut STATeSPON Sending INPut STATeON causes a Command Error Except for the program header separator any message from the Command Summary and Command Specification sections can be sent to the instrument exactly as defined by the syntax specification However these specifications do not reflect all details of the flexible syntax structure that is allowed when creating composite messages The characters and in a string expression are considered as meta symbols When these characters are to be sent as literals in a string they are placed between quote characters Example specification CH lt n gt where n 1 2 specifies the following strings CH CH1 CH2 but Number gt 2 specifies the string characters Number 2 4 1 2 Data types lt NRf gt lt NR1 gt lt 2 gt lt NR3 gt Decimal Numeric Data lt NR1 gt sign digit digit Notation for specifying a decimal number e g 179 sign lt NR2 gt NR2 is the same format as lt NR1 gt except that it uses an explicit decimal point and may or may not be preceded by a sign e g 179 56 NR3 NR3 is the same format as lt NR2 gt except that an exponent is added 0 1 7956 E 02 4 4 COMMAND REFERENCE integer numeric data hexadecimal data octal data binary data
295. where Ts the value of the trace sample and Vs the corresponding voltage amplitude The SENSe VOLTage lt n gt RANGe OFFSet command allows you to specify the vertical offset for each input channel After a RST command the vertical offset for each input channel is zero PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 SENSe VOLTage2 RANGe PTPeak 8 1 This sets the peak to peak range at 800 mV So the vertical sensitivity 800 8 100 mV CALL Send 0 8 SENSe VOLTage2 RANGe OFFSet 1 1 This sets a positive vertical offset of 100 mV i e 1 division 3 7 6 Autoranging attenuators The AUTO RANGE function automatically selects the vertical input sensitivity to keep the signal amplitude between 2 and 6 4 divisions on the screen Autoranging attenuators work independently on the following acquisition channels gt Input channel 1 2 3 and 4 for the PM33x4B CombiScope instruments gt Input channel 1 and 2 for the PM33x2B CombiScope instruments Auto attenuation uses a peak to peak calculation to determine the maximum and minimum value of an acquisition regardless of the input coupling When auto attenuation is switched on for an input channel n the input signal is automatically forced to AC coupling Still it is possible to switch to DC coupling by programming the INPut lt n gt COUPling DC command However in that case the proper operation cannot be guaranteed LIMITATION Auto attenuation is limited to 50 mV minimu
296. xecute the error reporting routine PROGRAM EXAMPLE ON PEN GOSUB ErrorCheck PEN ON lock ek APPLICATION PROGRAM okk kk END FS KOK OK OK OK OK OK kk ckckckckckckckckckckckckckckckck ckckckckckckckck ckckckckckckck Subroutine reading all errors from the error queue i KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KEKE KKKKKKKKKKKKKKK KK KKK KKK SUB ErrorCheck er SPACES 1 WHILE LEFT er 1 lt gt 0 Loop until 0 error CMD SYSTem ERRor CALL Send 0 8 CMD 1 Sends error query er SPACES 60 CALL Receive 0 8 er 256 Reads error string PRINT Error er Displays error string WEND END SUB 3 78 USING THE COMBISCOPE INSTRUMENTS 3 16 Saving Restoring Instrument Setups This level of programming involves all functions in the CombiScopes instruments i e complete instrument setups are processed This allows you to program one or more functions that are not individually programmable The following possibilities can be programmed e Restoring initial settings e Saving restoring complete setups via internal memory e Saving restoring complete or partical setups via the GPIB controller 3 16 1 How to restore initial settings Initial settings can be restored by sending the RST command This resets the instrument specific functions to a default state and selects the digital mode PROGRAM EXAMPLE CALL Send 0 8 RST 1 Resets the instrument for reset
297. y Both the source traces the command parameter may not be empty This command does not switch the mathematics function on this is done with the CALCulate MATH STATe command Note The first trace name can be substituted by the key word IMPLied In that case the trace name defined by CALCulate FEED is applicable Limitations CH3 Mi 3 and Mi 4 cannot be used in an expression for the PM33x0B CombiScope instruments Example Send CALCulate2 MATH CH1 CH2 Selects MATH channel 1 2 Send gt CALCulate2 MATH STATe ON Switches MATH function on Front panel compliance The CALCulate1 and CALCulate2 commands use the MATH1 and MATH2 features of the CombiScope instrument COMMAND REFERENCE 4 37 CALCulate lt n gt MATH STATe Syntax CALCulate lt n gt MATH STATe lt Boolean gt n 1 2 Query form CALCulate lt n gt MATH STATe Response 0 1 0 Mathematics function turned off 1 Mathematics function turned on Description This command switches the specified mathematics function on or off If the mathematics function is switched on the internal scale and offset are reset to initial values The result of the mathematics function is stored in M1_1 for CALCulate1 and in M2_1 for CALCulate2 After a RST command the mathematics function is turned off Example Send CALCulate MATH CH1 CH2 Selects MATH1 channel 1 2 Send CALCulate MATH STATe ON Switches MATH1 function on Front pane

Fluke PM-3370B User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents